EPA - 570/9-75-001
MANUAL OF
WATER WELL
CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
•••••••••••I
OFFICE OF WATER SUPPLY
-------
Acknowledgement
This manual was prepared under the auspices of the National Water Well
Association Committee on Water Well Standards, comprised of thirty-
four prominent technical and well contractor members of the ground water
industry, including representatives from state regulatory agencies. The
technical research, compilation and editing was performed by the NWWA
Research Facility at Rice University in Houston, Texas, under the general
direction of Dr. Jay H. Lehr, NWWA Executive Director, and the immediate
supervision of Mr. Michael D. Campbell, NWWARF Director of Research.
Other NWWA Research Facility technical and editorial personnel involved
in the project were: Mr. William A. Hunt, Mr. Lorin J. Staplin, Ms. Mary
Hodge, Ms. Emily N. DeWitt, and Ms. Stephanie S. Campbell. Many people
in industry and state and federal agencies also provided input, which is
gratefully acknowledged.
A special note of acknowledgement and gratitude is made to Mr. Robert
B. Heater for development of the basic format for the Key to these
standards.
The EPA office of Water Supply project officer was Mr. Edwin L. Hock-
man. Mr. Wilbur J. Whitsell and Mr. William E. Thompson of the Office
of Water Supply undertook the major tasks of review, editing, and project
coordination.
111
-------
NWWA Water Well
Standard Committee
REGIONAL COMMITTEEMEN
EASTERN SECTION:
MIDWEST SECTION
ROCKY MOUNTAIN
SECTION:
Note:
Mr. Edwin 0. Floyd (T)—North Carolina
Mr. Ira L. Goodwin, Jr. (C)—Maine
Mr. John Kriska (C)—Florida
*Mr. Richard Lauman (C)—New York
Mr. Michael Bell (T)—Virginia
Mr. Robert R. Peters (C)—Virginia
*Mr. Ralph E. Preble (T)—Massachusetts
**Mr. Robert B. Heater (Chairman) (C)
*Mr. John Brown (C)—Missouri
Mr. William M. Ebert (C)—Illinois
*Mr. Jerry T. Hill (C)—Indiana
Mr. John I. Johnson (C)—Louisiana
Mr. John E. Schmitt (C)—Michigan
Mr. Walter Stockert (C)—Ohio
Mr. William Walker (T)—Illinois
**Mr. Truman Bennett (Chairman) (T)
Mr. Tom Ahrens (T)—Colorado
Mr. Tommy C. Bussell (C)—Texas
Mr. Archie Hier (C)—Colorado
Mr. Barrel L. Jensen (C)—Nebraska
Mr. Joseph L. Mogg (T)—Minnesota
*Mr. Thomas L. Stevens (C)—Minnesota
*Mr. Taylor Virdell (C)—Texas
Mr. Howard M. White (C)—Iowa
**Mr. Michael D. Campbell (Chairman) (T)
Mr. William S. Bartholomew (T)—Oregon
Mr. William G. Coffey (C)—New Mexico
Mr. J. F. Guardino (C)—California
Mr. Keith Robertson (C)—Nevada
Mr. Harold 0. Meyer (C)—Washington
*Mr. William Osborne (C)—Montana
*Mr. Edwin A. Ritchie (T)—California
Mr. Robert L. Strasser (C)—Oregon
**Dr. Jay H. Lehr (Chairman) (T)
(C) = Contractor Member of Committee (23 members)
(T) = Technical Member of Committee (11 members)
*=Member of the National Committee (Elected by Each of the Four
Regional Commitees)
**=Member of the Steering Committee (Chairman's Committee)
PACIFIC SECTION
IV
-------
Page
INTRODUCTION 1
KEY TO WELL STANDARDS 4
GENERAL PREAMBLE 9
SECTION 1. GENERAL CONDITIONS 11
Article
1, Definition of Terms 11
2. Award, Execution of Documents, Delivery of Bonds, etc. 12
3. Progress and Submission Schedules; Preconstruction Conference;
Time for Starting the Work 13
4. Correlation, Interpretation and Intent of Contract Documents 14
5. Ownership and Copies of Documents; Record Documents 14
6. Work by Others 15
7. Subcontracts 16
8. Materials, Equipment and Labor: Substitute Material or Equipment 17
9. Patent Fees and Royalties 18
10. Permits, Laws, Taxes and Regulations , 18
11. Availability of Lands; Physical and Subsurface Conditions;
Reference Points 18
12. Use of Premises 19
13. OWNER'S Status During Construction 20
14. PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE'S Interpretation and Decisions ._ 21
15. Shop Drawings and Samples 22
16. Tests and Inspections 23
17. CONTRACTOR'S Supervision and Superintendance 23
18. Safety and Protection; Emergencies 24
19. Access to the Work; Uncovering Finished Work 25
20. Changes in the Work 26
21. Change of Contract Price 27
22. Cash Allowances ' 28
23. Change of the Contract Time 28
24. Neglected Work 29
25. Warranty and Guarantee; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of
Defective Work 29
26. Application for Progress Payments 30
27. Approval of Payments 31
28. Substantial Completion 32
29. Partial Utilization 33
30. Final Payment 34
31. Waivers of Claims and Continuing Obligations 35
-------
Page
32. Indemnification 35
33. Contract Bonds 36
34. CONTRACTOR'S Liability Insurance 36
35. OWNER'S Liability Insurance 37
36. Property Insurance 37
37. Cleaning up 38
38. OWNER'S Right to Stop or Suspend Work 38
39. OWNER'S Right to Terminate 39
40. CONTRACTOR'S Right to Stop Work or Terminate 40
41. Arbitration 40
42. Miscellaneous 41
SECTION 2. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 42
Article
43. General 42
44. Glossary of Technical Terms 42
SECTION 3. TECHNICAL STANDARDS 48
Article
45. Test Holes and Samples 48
HOLE LOCATION AND PURPOSE
45.100-000-000. Hole Location and Purpose 51
DRILLING METHODS
45.010-000-000. Contractor's Choice 51
45.020-000-000. Driven Well Paint Method 51
45.030-000-000. Jetting or Hydraulicing Method 51
45.040-000-000. Reverse Hydraulic Rotary Method 51
45.050-000-000. Air Rotary Method 51
45.060-000-000. Rotary Method 51
45.070-000-000. Combined Driving and Drilling Method 51
45.080-000-000. Cable Tool Method 52
DRILLER'S LOGS AND REPORTS
45.001-000-000. Driller's Log 52
45.002-000-000. Daily Driller's Report 53
45.003-000-000. Penetration Rate Log 54
45.040-000-000. Stratigraphic Log 55
GEOPHYSICAL/MECHANICAL LOGS
45.000-100-000. Geophysical/Mechanical Logs 58
FORMATION SAMPLING METHODS
45.000-010-000. Contractor's Choice 58
45.000-020-000. Return Flow Method (Continuous) 58
45.000-030-000. Return Flow Method (Circulated) 58
45.000-040-000. Auger Method 59
45.000-050-000. Bailer Method 59
45.000-060-000. Core Barrel Method 59
45.000-070-000. Piston Tube Method 59
VI
-------
Page
45.000-080-000. Split Spoon Method 59
45.000-090-000. Side Hole Core Method 59
FORMATION pAMPLINC INTERVAL
45.000-001-000. Sampling by Formation Interval 60
45.000-002-000. Sampling by Measured Intervals 60
45.000-003-000. Sampling by Measured and Formation Intervals 60
WATER (AQUIFER) SAMPLING
45.000-000-100. Water Sampling 60
FORMATION SAMPLE SIZE, HANDLING AND IDENTIFICATION
45.000-000-010. Size of Sample: Containers, Identification, Storage
and Transfer 61
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR TEST HOLES AND SAMPLES
45.000-000-001. Method of Payment
Option A (Lump Sum) 61
Option B (Time and Materials) 62
Option C (Unit Price) 62
Article
46. Well Construction 62
METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION
46.100-000-000. Methods of Construction 66
DRILLING FLUID CONTROL PROGRAM
46.010-000-000. Production Zone Protection 67
DRILLER'S LOG AND REPORTS
46.001-000-000. Logs 68
TEMPORARY CAPPING
46.000-100-000. Temporary Capping 68
METHOD OF PAYMENT OF WELL CONSTRUCTION
46.000-010-000. Method of Payment
Option A (Lump Sum) 68
Option B (Time and Materials) 68
Option C (Unit Price) 68
Article
47. Well Casing Selection and Installation 68
CASING SELECTION
47.100-000-000. Well Casing Selection 74
METHODS OF INSTALLATION
47.010-000-000. Driven (Well Point) 76
47.020-000-000. Jacking 76
47.030-000-000. Driven (Drive Shoe) 76
47.040-000-000. Lowering 76
47.050-000-000. Floating 76
vn
-------
Page
METHOD OF JOINING
47.001-000-000. Contractor's Choice 77
SANITARY PROTECTION OF WELL
47.000-100-000. Termination at Top of Well 77
CASING SEATING
47.000-010-000. Unconsolidated Formations 78
47.000-020-000. Consolidated Formations 78
PRESSURE TESTING OF SEATING
47.000-001-000. Pressure Testing of Seating 78
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR CASING AND INSTALLATION
47.000-000-100. Method of Payment
Option A (Lump Sum) 78
Option B (Time and Materials) 78
Option C (Unit Price) 78
Article
48. Well Grouting 79
GROUTING MATERIALS TO BE USED
48.100-000-000. Concrete Grout 81
48.200-000-000. Sand Cement Grout 81
48.300-000-000. Neat Cement Grout 81
METHODS OF INSTALLATION OF GROUT
48.010-000-000. Bailer Dumping 81
48.020-000-000. Gravity Filling Without Tremie Method 82
48.030-000-000. Tremie Method 82
48.040-000-000. Positive Placement—Exterior Method 82
48.050-000-000. Positive Placement—Exterior Method—Two Plug 83
48.060-000-000. Positive Placement—Interior Method—Upper
Plug 83
48.070-000-000. Positive Placement—Interior Method-Capped
Casing , 83
48.080-000-000. Continuous Injection Method 84
48.090-000-000. Grout Displacement Method 84
LOCATION OF GROUT
48.001-000-000. Surface Formation Seal 85
48.002-000-000. Bottom Seal Grouting 85
48.003-000-000. Selected Interval Grouting 85
48.004-000-000. Continuous Grouting 85
CENTRALIZERS
48.000-100-000. Contractor's Choice 85
48.000-200-000. Centralizers at Bottom of Hole 87
48.000-300-000. Centralizers at Bottom of Hole and Other Critical
Grouting Points 87
48.000-400-000. Centralizers at 25 Feet Intervals 87
Vlll
-------
Page
GEOPHYSICAL LOGGING FOR CEMENT BOND
48.000-010-000. Acoustic-Sonic Cement Bond Log 87
PRESSURE TESTING OF GROUT SEAL
48.000-001-000. Pressure Testing of Grout Seal 87
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR GROUTING
48.000-000-100. Method of Payment
Option A (Lump Sum) 87
Option B (Time and Materials) 87
Option C (Unit Price) . 87
Article
49. Well Screen and Perforations 88
FILTER TYPE SCREEN
49.100-000-000. Filter Type Selection 90
SCREEN-TYPE SELECTION
49.010-000-000. Contractor's Choice 90
49.020-000-000. Perforated Pipe 90
49.030-000-000. Punched (With Material Removed) and Slotted
Pipe 91
49.040-000-000. Reinforced Wire Wrapped Punched Pipe 91
49.050-000-000. Artificial Filter Screen (Precast) 91
49.060-000-000. Louvred Pipe 91
49.070-000-000. Continuous Slot Wire Wound Screen 91
SCREEN APERATURE SIZE
49.001-000-000. Contractor's Choice 91
49.0002-000-000. Aperature Size Selection Criteria 91
SCREEN LENGTH
49.000-100-000. Contractor's Choice 92
49.000-200-000. Screen Length Selection Criteria 92
METHOD OF SCREEN INSTALLATION
49.000-010-000. Contractor's Choice 93
49.000-020-000. Driven Well Point Method 93
49.000-030-000. Washing Method 93
49.000-040-000. Pull Back Method 93
49.000-050-000. Driven Through Casing Method 93
49.000-060-000. Bailed Through Casing Method 93
49.000-070-000. Bailed or Air Jetted Through Casing Method -- 94
49.000-080-000. Washed Through Casing Method 94
49.000-090-000. Suspend From Surface Method 94
METHOD OF JOINING SCREEN TO SCREEN
49.000-001-000. Joining 94
METHOD OF CONNECTING SCREEN TO CASING
49.000-000-100. Neoprene or Rubber Seal 94
49.000-000-200. Lead Packer 94
IX
-------
Page
49.000-000-300. Cement Fill in Annulus 95
49.000-000^00. Threaded, Coupled, Welded Joints 95
METHODS OF SEALING SCREEN BOTTOM
49.000-000-010. Lead Method 95
49.000-000-020. Bag Cement Method 95
49.000-000-030. Self-Closing Valve Method 95
49.000-000-040. Fabricated Plug Method 95
49.000-000-050. Welded Plate Method (Casing Material) 95
49.000-000-060. Welded Plate Method (Screen Material) 95
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR WELL SCREENS
49.000-000-001. Method of Payment
Option A (Lump Sum) 95
Option B (Time and Materials) 95
Option C (Unit Price) 96
Article
50. Well Filter Construction (Artificial) 96
FILTER-TYPE SELECTION
50.100-000-000. General Criteria 97
FILTER CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
50.010-000-000. General 98
SELECTION OF FILTER GRAIN SIZE AND SCREEN APERTURE SIZE
50.001-000-000. Contractor's Choice 98
50.002-000-000. Selection Criteria 98
LENGTH OF ARTIFICIAL FILTER
50.000-100-000. 98
50.000-200-000. 98
50.000-300-000. 98
50.000-400-000. 98
STORAGE OF FILTER MATERIAL
50.000-010-000. Bulk Delivery—Open Storage 99
50.000-020-000. Bulk Delivery—Covered Storage 1 99
50.000-030-000. Bagged Delivery 99
DISINFECTION OF FILTER MATERIAL
50.000-001-000. Disinfection 99
METHOD OF INSTALLATION OF FILTER MATERIAL
50.000-000-100. Poured 99
50.000-000-200. Poured with Fluid 99
50.000-000-300. Tremie Placed 99
50.000-000-400. Tremie Placed with Fluid 99
50.000-000-500. Tremie with Ell 99
50.000-000-600. Crossover Tool 99
-------
Page
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR ARTIFICIAL WELL FILTER
50.000-000-010. Method of Payment
Option A (Lump Sum) 100
Option B (Time and Materials) 100
Option C (Unit Price) 100
Article
51. Well Plumbness and Alignment 100
METHODS OF TESTING
51.100-000-000. Plumbness and Alignment Test 100
51.200-000-000. Plumbness and Alignment Test 101
51.300-000-000. Drift Indicator Survey 103
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR WELL PLUMBNESS AND ALIGNMENT
51.010-000-000. Method of Payment
Option A (Lump Sum) 104
Option B (Time and Materials) 104
Option C (Unit Price) 104
Article
52. Well Development 104
PUMPING OR BAILING METHOD
52.100-000-000. Continuous Overpumping 106
52.200-000-000. Interrupted Overpumping 106
52.300-000-000. Surging and Bailing (Utilizing Bailer) 106
52.400-000-000. Surging and Bailing (Utilizing Surge Block) __ 107
MECHANICAL SURGING AND PUMPING METHOD
52.010-000-000. Surging and Pumping 107
HYDRAULIC JETTING METHOD
52.001-000-000. Hydraulic Jetting 107
AIR DEVELOPMENT METHOD
52.000-100-000. Single Pipe System Open to Atmosphere 107
52.000-200-000. Single Pipe System Closed to Atmosphere 107
52.000-300-000. Two Pipe System 108
DEVELOPMENT AIDS
52.000-010-000. Washing with Water 109
52.000-020-000. Washing with Chemicals 109
SAND CONTENT TESTING
52.000-001-000. Sand Content Testing , 109
SA1JD CONTENT LIMITS
52.000-000-100. 109
52.000-000-200. 109
52.000-000-300. 109
52.000-000-400. 110
52.000-000-500. 110
XI
-------
Page
RECORD OF MEASUREMENT
52.000-000-010. Recording Measurements 110
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR WELL DEVELOPMENT
52.000-000-001. Method of Payment
Option A (Lump Sum) 110
Option B (Time and Materials) 110
Option C (Unit Price) 110
Article
53. Well Testing for Performance T 110
TYPES OF PUMPING TEST PERFORMED
53.100-000-000. Bailing Test Method 112
53.200-000-000. Air Blow Test Method 112
53.300-000-000. Air Lift Test Method 112
53.400-000-000. Variable Rate Method 113
53.500-000-000. Constant Rate Method 113
53.600-000-000. Step-Continuous Composite Method 114
ABORTED TESTS
53.010-000-000. Aborted Tests 115
LOCATION OF DISCHARGE
53.001-000-000. Discharge Water 115
RECORD OF PUMPING TESTS
53.000-100-000. Records 115
MEASUREMENT OF WATER LEVELS
53.000-010-000. Bailer Line Method 116
53.000-020-000. Contractor's Choice 116
53.000-030-000. Air Line Method 116
53.000-040-000. Steel Tape Method 116
53.000-050-000. Electric Sounder Method 117
COLLECTION OF WATER SAMPLES
53.000-001-000. Water Samples and Analysis 117
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR TESTING FOR PERFORMANCE
53.000-000-100. Method of Payment
Option A (Lump Sum) 117
Option B (Time and Materials) 117
Option C (Unit Price) 117
Article
54. Well Disinfection 117
SCHEDULING DISINFECTION
54.100-000-000. 120
DISINFECTANTS
54.010-000-000. 120
Xll
-------
Page
INTERIM DISINFECTION
54.001-000-000. 120
DAILY OPERATIONS DISINFECTION
54.000-100-000. 121
DISINFECTION PROCEDURE
54.000-010-000. 121
DISINFECTION OF WATER; TABLE WELLS
54.000-001-000. Dry Chlorine Compounds 122
54.000-002-000. Stock Solution (I) 122
54.000-003-000. Stock Solution (II) 122
54.000-004-000. Prepared Solution 122
DISFECTION OF FLOWING ARTESIAN WELLS
54.000-000-100. Dry Chlorine Compounds 122
54.000-000-200. Controlled Flow Disinfection 122
54.000-000-300. Stock Solution 123
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR WELL DISINFECTION
54.000-000-010. Method of Payment
Option A (Lump Sum) 123
Option B (Time and Materials) 123
Option C (Unit Price) 123
Article
55. Water Samples and Analyses 123
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSES
55.100-000-000. Bacterial 126
ANALYSIS FOR SPECIFIC CONSTITUENTS
55.010-000-000. Specific Constituent-Analysis 126
ANALYSIS FOR SPECIFIC PURPOSES
55.001-000-000. Domestic Water Supply 127
55.002-000-000. Well and Treatment Facility Design 127
55.003-000-000. Irrigation Water Supply 127
55.004-000-000. Industrial Water Supply 128
55.005-000-000. Municipal Water Supply 128
TYPES OF SAMPLES
55.000-100-000. Bacterial Sampling 128
•55.000-200-000. Bacterial Sampling Plus Chemical Sampling 129
55.000-300-000. Bacterial Sampling Plus Chemical Sampling Plus
Radiological Sampling 129
55.000^00-000. Chemical Sampling Only 129
55.000-500-000. Chemical Sampling Plus Radiological Sampling.- 130
55.000-600-000. Radiological Sampling Only 130
COLLECTION METHODS
55.000-010-000. Bailed Sample Method 130
55.000-020-000. Discharge Sample Method 130
Xlll
-------
Page
55.000-030-000. Pumped Sample: Composite 130
55.000-040-000. Point Sample 130
55.000-050-000. Pumped Sample: Segregated (Drill Stem Test
Sample) 130
WELL HEAD TESTS
55.000-001-000. Temperature and pH Tests Only 131
55.000-002-000. Temperature and pH Tests Plus Gas Test 131
55.000-003-000. Temperature and pH Tests Plus Specific Electrical
Conductance Test 131
55.000-004-000. Temperature and pH Tests Plus Specific Electrical
Conductance Test Plus Alkalinity and Turbidity
Tests 131
55.000-005-000. Temperature and pH Tests Plus Gas Test Plus
Specific Electrical Conductance Test 132
55.000-006-000. Temperature and pH Tests Plus Gas Test Plus
Specific Electrical Conductance Test Plus Alka-
linity and Turbidity Tests 132
STANDARDS OF TEST AND SAMPLES
55.000-000-100. Laboratory Requirements 132
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR WATER SAMPLES AND ANALYSES
55.000-000-010. Method of Payment
Option A (Lump Sum) 133
Option B (Time and Materials) 133
Option C (Unit Price) 133
Article
56. Permanent Well and Test Hole Abandonment 133
AQUIFER SEALING CRITERIA
56.100-000-000. Aquifer Sealing Criteria 136
PERMANENT BRIDGES
56.010-000-000. Permanent Bridges 140
PLACEMENT OF GROUT
56.001-000-000. Placement Operations 140
56.002-000-000. Intermediate Seals 140
56.003-000-000. Seal at Uppermost Aquifer 140
56.004-000-000. Seals Placed Within Casing, Liners, Filters, etc. 141
PLACEMENT OF FILL
56.000-100-000. Non-Producing Zones 141
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
56.000-010-000. Pre-existing Contamination 141
WELL ABANDONMENT RECORDS
56.000-001-000. Recording Location of Abandoned Well or Bore
Hole 142
XIV
-------
Page
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR ABANDONMENT
56.000-000-100. Method of Payment
Option A (Lump Sum) 142
Option B (Time and Materials) 142
Option C (Unit Price) 142
APPENDIX A. SAMPLE NOTICE TO BIDDERS 143
APPENDIX B. SAMPLE PROPOSAL 145
APPENDIX C. UNIT PRICE PROPOSAL 147
APPENDIX D. BID SCHEDULE 150
APPENDIX E. STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND
CONTRACTOR 152
APPENDIX F. STANDARD FORM—WELL ESTIMATE AND/OR WELL DRILL-
ING CONTRACT OR REPAIR ORDER AGREEMENT 154
APPENDIX G. METRIC-ENGLISH UNIT CONVERSION TABLE 156
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1. Minimum Lengths of Cement for Different Sizes and Lengths
of Casing 86
Figure 2. PJumbness Test Assembly 102
Figure 3. Centrifugal Sand Sampler 110
Figure 4. Permanent Bridge Seals 137
Figure 5. Intermediate Seal in Lined Hole 138
Figure 6. Uppermost Aquifer Seals in Well Abandonment 139
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1. Various Size Grade Scales in Common Use 56
Table 2. Line Shaft Turbines 1800 RPM 71
Table 3. Line Shaft Turbines 1200 RPM 71
Table 4. Casing Sizes—Domestic Wells 72
Table 5. Collapse Strength of Steel Pipe in Pounds Per Square Inch and
Feet of Water Head 73
Table 6. Wall Thicknesses for Steel-Water Well Pipe 74
Table 7. Steel Well Casing Fabricated from Standard Plate or Sheets 74
Table 8. Steel Well Casing Fabricated from "Well Casing Steel" Sheets __ 75
Table 9. PVC Casing 75
Table 10. PVC Casing 75
Table 11. Maximum Screen Entrance Velocities 90
Table 12. Chlorine Compound Required to Dose 100 feet of Water-Filled
Well at 50 PPM 121
xv
-------
EPA III A-350-76
Introduction
During 1969 through 1971 the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
and its predecessor the USPHS Bureau of Water Hygiene, through the
Southern Regional Education Board, conducted limited surveys of indi-
vidual home water supply systems in Georgia, Tennessee and Kentucky to
determine the quality of drinking water from individual home supply
systems and to establish the relationship of the quality of water to type
supply system.
The first study, conducted in Georgia in 1969, produced unexpected re-
sults. Bacterial analyses of 760 sampled systems showed verified coliform
bacteria in 300 (40%) of the samples. Included in the survey were 709
wells of which 265 (37%) showed verified coliform bacteria. A break
down of all individual home supply systems versus verified coliform
showed the following contamination: cisterns—84.2%, springs—73.9%,
dug well—74.5%, bored wells—39.4%, drilled wells—18.0%, driven wells
—16.7%, and jetted wells—7.1%. Secondly, from this it is obvious that
there is some relationship between contamination and type of water sup-
ply. The high levels of contamination of cisterns and springs could be
explained but the high contamination of wells which tap presumed bac-
terially pure ground water was unclear. Furthermore, data and informa-
tion from Tennessee and Kentucky supported the findings in Georgia.
Historically, ground water coming from its natural environment has
been considered of good sanitary quality requiring little or no treatment
before use as drinking water. Consequently nearly 50 million Americans
obtain their drinking water from individual home supply wells tapping this
water resource. The data from Georgia, Tennessee and Kentucky, how-
ever, indicate that we may have been taking the high bacterial purity of
our ground water supplies for granted.
The data collected on system construction appears to have produced the
answer on the bacterial contamination of wells. The method used to con-
struct wells, and the construction details themselves affect the bacterial
safety of the supply.
Deficiencies in well construction among individual supplies were found
to be numerous and included: 1) insufficient and substandard well casing;
2) inadequate "formation seal" between the well casing and the bore
hole; 3) poor welding of casing joints; 4) lack of sanitary covers; and
5) use of well pits to protect from freezing. Any one of these deficiencies
may allow introduction of bacterial contamination from the surface to
the ground water and into the supply system.
1
-------
The problems facing the person receiving drinking water from an indi-
vidual water supply system were brought forth during testimony in Con-
gress on the Safe Drinking Water Act. Testimony indicated that millions
of Americans may be receiving drinking water which would not meet drink-
ing standards mandated by the Act. As designed, the standards only apply
to water delivered by public water supply systems, leaving the individual
home supply system unprotected. Congress expressed concern and desire
that adequate protection for persons relying on individual water systems
for their drinking water be made available.
Predicated upon the results of the State surveys and the testimony be-
fore Congress an unsolicited proposal for the development of well construc-
tion specifications was presented to the EPA in September of 1971 by the
National Water Well Association. NWWA was concerned that the profes-
sion they represent (water well drillers and ground water specialists) was
using construction procedures which could affect the public health. They
felt "a set of generally accepted specifications for well construction that
could be widely distributed to consulting engineers, water well contractors,
municipalities, industries, agriculturalists, and individual home owners
would serve to complement existing regulations, help educate the public,
upgrade existing well construction techniques and thereby afford a greater
protection to our ground water reserves."
During preparation of the manual, consideration was given to minimum
standards already required by many States as well as pertinent suggested
standards and specifications already available from other national and state
associations. The manual was designed recognizing that well construction
techniques will vary with six major criteria; namely, the intended use of
the water, the required capacity of the well, the nature of the producing
zone, the intended drilling method, and the manner in which the well con-
struction will be paid for. Using these criteria to describe a well, alternate
methods were established for the many facets of well construction such as
test drilling, logging, casing, grouting, cementing, gravel packing, plumb-
ness, alignment, development, testing, disinfection, sampling, and abandon-
ment.
Also in the manual is a section titled "General Conditions" which is
methodology by which a contractor may be engaged to construct a water
well. These articles are included in this technical construction manual to
inform those unfamiliar with the water well construction profession of
normal procedures used when contracting for a well. The EPA feels this
information should be made available to the public but recognizes that
there may be other adequate alternatives.
Even though the original purpose of this project was to solve contami-
nation problems of the individual supply system, the manual has been
designed to be applicable to all types of water wells for all purposes.
Proper use of this manual will result in a productive and safe water sup-
ply well.
-------
The well construction practices outlined in this manual are supported by
EPA as being complete and environmentally sound. The manual is to be
a guide to well construction which provides protection of public health,
safety and welfare, and protection of the ground water resources. Practices
and techniques discussed are not EPA recommendations, regulations or
standards required under any Federal action; they are furnished for in-
formational and educational purposes only.
-------
Key To
Well Standards
How to Use the Key
to Obtain the Appropriate Language
for Preparing Water Well Specifications
The Key consists of two parts: the "Master Key", and the "Specifi-
cations Preparation Worksheet and Guide". For convenience these should
be located now. They may be found in the pocket inside the back cover
of this manual.
MASTER KEY
The first step in selecting the proper specifications for your water well
requirements is to consult the "Master Key". This sheet contains three
features. Along the left margin numbered I through VI, Well Selection
Criteria are listed in the following form:
I. Well Purpose
II. Design Capacity
III. Character of Interval Penetrated
IV. Character o) Producing Zone
V. Construction of Methods
VI. Method of Payment
By selecting one condition or characteristic from each of the above six
criteria, the well, regardless of the requirements of the job, will be prop-
erly keyed according to conditions expected in construction of the well.
Let us assume, for example, the following conditions:
From I—Well Purpose. The requirement is for a "municipal well":
select "C".
From II—Design Capacity. You require a production rate greater than
100 gpm: select "K".
From III—Character of Interval Penetrated. You may or may not know
what to expect in the subsurface. If you do know, or have determined the
nature of the subsurface (above the anticipated production zone or zones)
from water-well records, or by consulting a hydrogeologist or water well
contractor, the selection can be made with confidence. The character of
this interval determines the type of drilling which is most appropriate, the
4
-------
approximate length of casing required, and other features related to well
design.
In this example assume condition "L", unconsolidated.
From IV—Character of Producing Zone. Assuming that you know the
character of the producing zone or aquifer, select condition "P", un-
consolidated.
From V—Construction Methods. Based on the type of material to be
drilled and on the type of aquifer or producing zone to be developed,
assume you have selected "X.I", or the conventional fluid rotary drilling
method.
From VI—Method of Payment. The method of payment you desire for
this job, for example, is "Z", or on the basis of "time and materials".
Conditions of well construction have now been denned and can be char-
acterized by the notation: C K L P X.I Z. Please note that not more than
six criteria should be selected; one from each list (I through VI).
The second feature of the Master Key is the display along the top of
Articles which identify the major subdivisions of the Compendium,
Articles 1 through 42 represent the General Conditions; Article 43 repre-
sents the Special Conditions, and Article 44 is the Glossary of Technical
Terms, all of which become part of every set of specifications prepared
with the exception of some domestic well applications (See Master Key).
General and Special Conditions can be replaced for these types of appli-
cations by the Standard Contract Form in Appendic.es E and F, which
contains appropriate language covering both general and special condi-
tions. Articles 45 through 56 are, in effect, the Technical Standards, from
which are drawn only the paragraphs as appropriate for a well denned by
the "Well Selection Criteria" mentioned previously. Use of the "Well
Selection Criteria" in accordance with the procedure described herein pro-
vides criteria for suggested minimum practice. A full review of all para-
graphs within any one Article is recommended.
The third feature of the Master Key is the list of numbers which make
up the matrix. Although the function of these numbers will be described
in detail shortly, suffice it here to state, by way of introduction, that the
numbers define the critical conditions of well design which control con-
struction practices.
It should be noted that the Key has been prepared for and tested over
a wide variety of possible conditions.
SPECIFICATION PREPARATION WORKSHEET
AND GUIDE
The second step in selecting proper specifications for your well re-
quirements is to fill-in the appropriate blocks of the Specifications Prepara-
tion Worksheet. As an example the Specifications Preparation Worksheet
Guide (SPW Guide) has been prepared, with numbers filled-in according
-------
to the requirements of the hypothetical well discussed previously. These
numbers identify specific paragraphs (Articles) in the Compendium. For
example, find Article 45.000-000-100 in the Compendium. This para-
graph gives standard procedures for the sampling of water from test holes.
Note that each digit to the right of the Article number (45. in this ex-
ample) refers to a subsection as listed across the top of the Master Key
.and as contained in the Compendium. The maximum number of subsec-
tions in any one Article is nine, although more (identified with double
digits, 10, 11, etc.) could be added.
Please note that not all nine digits are used in some of the Article head-
ings (for example see Article 51. Well Plumbness and Alignment), be-
cause the existing paragraphs appear to cover the most important aspects
of the subject. However, other paragraphs may be added to this or other
Articles at a later date if needed.
Having become familiar with the numbering and coding system with
respect to the location of the paragraphs within the matrix, we now turn
to the problem of compatability between construction parameters. Certain
conditions may dictate specific and oftimes special design and construc-
tion considerations. Those critical conditions are isolated in the following
way:
Referring to the Master Key and the previously derived well notation
of C K L P X.I Z, read across line "C" (Municipal) to Article 45. (Test
Holes and Samples) vertical column 1 under the heading: "Hole Location
and Purpose". Note that a "1" occupies that space. Now read across line
"K" (High Yield) to Article 45. vertical column 1. Note that a "1" also
occupies that space. Now reading in the same manner "L" has a "zero",
"P" also a "zero", then "X.I" also a "zero" and "Z" a "0." Now compare
the numbers obtained.
C = l
K = l
L = 0
P = 0
X.l = 0
Z = 0
Number "1", the highest number listed, refers to the first paragraph
in Article 45. This paragraph describes the basic conditions (minimum
acceptable standard) stipulated by the well's notation C K L P X.I Z. The
number is inserted in column 1 of the Specifications' Preparation Work-
sheet as shown in the SPW Guide. This indicates that the first para-
graph, or any of those higher in number within the same digit column,
is acceptable, the, first being the minimum standard in this example. The
sequence of paragraphs can be considered as going from the simplest proce-
dure or method to the most complex, implying a corresponding increase
in cost.
-------
The second, third, fourth, etc. to ninth columns of Article 45 are also
to be evaluated as above. For example, in Column 2 of Article 45 (Test
Holes and Samples) under the heading: "Drilling Methods", the following
numbers are obtained from the Master Key:
C = l
K = l
L = l
P = l
X.l=6
Z = 0
Here "6" is the highest number shown adn hence identifies the critical
parameter which controls the minimum standard acceptable. In this hypo-
thetical case, a "municipal, high-yield, test hole is to be drilled through
uncohsolidated sediments and developed for production in an unconsoli-
dated aquifer on the basis of time and materials payment. The well is to
be drilled by the conventional fluid rotary drilling method, or by a method
listed after Article 45.060-000-000 e.g. 45.070-000-000 (Combined Drill-
ing and Driving), 45.0SO-000-000 (Cable-Tool Method). This test hole
is not to be constructed by the methods indicated in lower numbered para-
graphs e.g. 45.050-000-000 (Air Circulation Fluid Rotary), 45.040-000-
000 (Reverse Hydraulic Rotary), 45.050-000-000 (Jetted or Hydraulic-
ing) or 45.020-000-000 (Driven Well Point Method). Contractor's
Choice (Article 45.010-000-000) was not selected, since in this hypotheti-
cal case a particular method of drilling was preferred by the person using
the "Well Selection Criteria".
The above process should be repeated for the remainder of the columns
of Article 45., as indicated for the example cited in the SPW Guide.
Articles 46. through 56. should be treated in the same manner.
There are a few exceptions to the straightforward procedure of selecting
appropriate Articles for establishing minimum standards. These are iden-
tified as follows:
*—Indicates that a paragraph is not selected, regardless of the numbers
shown elsewhere in the column.
P—Indicates that an optional condition exists and a choice must be
made in the indicated paragraph of the Compendium.
F—Indicates that blank(s) must be filled in according to specific re-
quirements.
0—Indicates that no paragraph is appropriate at the particular entry
location.
S—Indicates that paragraphs must be selected according to previously
selected options. The "S" is to be replaced by the number of the para-
graph selected.
C—Indicates that a cross-reference to another Article must be made for
the correct paragraphs.
-------
R—Indicates that the General and Special Conditions contained in the
Compendium, can be replaced by the Standard Contract Form in Appen-
dices E and F. This is designed for some relatively small contracts such
as for domestic wells.
The above exceptions are noted by use of a period after the number of
the indicated paragraph, e.g., 45.000—003.F-000. Such a notation indicates
that in the 3rd Article of that sequence a fill-in is required.
To summarize the generated specifications, use the SP\V Guide. List
them as follows in preparing specifications for a well with the criteria
C K L P X.I Z, meeting minimum acceptable well standards.
Articles 1. through 44.
ji C
46.
/i T
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
1
l.P
l.F
2
1
1
1
4
4.F
1
1
1
6
l.F
4
3
5
l.C
l.P
1
1
1
l.F
1
2
I
1
4
2
2
0
1
1
1
5
1
l.P
1
1
3
2
2
0
1
3
1
S.F
1
2
l.P
1
0
9
1
0
1
l.P
1
2.F
1
3.F
0
I
1
1
1
0
1
l.C
1
s
1
1
0
l.P
l.P
P
4
0
4
l.P
1
1
1.P
1
0
0
0
2
l.P
0
1
0
l.P
l.P
0
l.P
0
0
0
l.P
0
0
l.P
0
0
0
0
Two features of the Key are re-emphasized here. Any Article in a
selected sequence of Articles which is higher in number (or follows a
specific Article) is not only an acceptable standard but is also usually of
a higher standard than those Articles having lower numbers. (Note the
number of zeros to the right of the Article number.) It should also be
emphasized that for a very few Articles the relative position of the Article
does not indicate standard level in that one technique or method may not
necessarily be more appropriate than the other. For such instances selec-
tion is made on the basis of preference, depending upon conditions.
The standards expressed herein are those deemed the minimum ac-
ceptable standards which concurrently stipulate technically sound, eco-
nomically efficient, and environmentally cognizant water-well construction
practices.
-------
General Preamble
The primary purposes of well construction standards are to protect the
health, safety and welfare of the public; to protect ground water resources,
and the environment in general, for present and future use; and to per-
mit optimum water production from each well at minimal cost.
These standards have been prepared to accomplish these purposes and
to obtain the most appropriately designed well consistent with the need
for water from that well. These standards are written such that appropriate
descriptive paragraphs can be adapted for use in the preparation of spe-
cifications for water-well construction. When properly used, they will re-
sult in adequate minimum specifications for water-well construction.
Throughout the standards, the general plan followed is that the higher
the coded number (paragraph) used with a specific Article the higher is
the quality or design of the material or construction method used. How-
ever, it is fully realized that special conditions may require specific and
unique solutions. Equal weight is given a number of choices occasionally,
since no one method may be any more efficient or effective than another
for some geohydrologic conditions.
These standards are designed for the great majority of engineers and
governmental officials whose major expertise is not in the field of well
construction. These standards are designed to improve communications
between the planner and the technical man in the field. They will assist
planners in preparing satisfactory specifications for the majority of wells
to be drilled. In instances where unusual or critical conditions occur, a
person versed in the problems of well construction and design (usually a
ground water geologist or hydrologist) should write the specifications.
The NOTICE TO BIDDERS portion of a well contract is a variable
document which must be written individually for each project. A sample
notice, for general guidance only, is included as Appendix A.
The PROPOSAL FORM is another part of the contract that should be
written individually for each project. Sample proposal forms which pro-
vide general guidance are included as Appendices B and C. A BID
SCHEDULE to accompany the unit price proposal in Appendix C is
presented in Appendix D.
The BID BOND and the PERFORMANCE BOND are often included
as portions of the contract. If used they should be written or completed in
accordance with the instructions of the customer or his bonding agency.
The Standard Form Agreement is the major contract document. For
general reference a sample agreement is included as Appendices E and F.
-------
Because of the growing use of the metric system of measurement a
metric-English unit conversion table is included as Appendix G.
Before entering into any discussion of construction standards it is im-
perative that each person concerned with the design and actual construc-
tion of a facility be reminded of the legal and moral responsibility of the
employer and his supervisor to provide employees with a safe working
environment. Employers have been provided with sets of safety standards,
the most comprehensive of which are those of the U.S. Department of
Labor, prepared under the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970.
Any prospective designer, planner, or contractor should avail himself of
the safety standards for his occupation and become familiar with their
contents.
Anyone acquainted with manual labor may be familiar with the old
saying that there is a proper tool for every job. It is the purpose of safety
programs, through training, supervision, and inspection, to prescribe that
tool, and to assure that it is used and kept in the best possible condition.
The water-related industries, especially the well construction industry,
have more than their share of occupational hazards and as such require
alertness and diligence on the part of all personnel to avoid hazardous
situations. The following is a checklist of the categories for which there are
standards for the industry. Of particular concern are the sections on dan-
gerous vapors and electrocution, for these hazards are the ones most often
overlooked in daily operations:
• Safety Training
• General Housekeeping of Construction Site
• Personal Protective Equipment Both Individual and Site
• Availability of Medical Supplies, Personnel and Facilities
• Sanitation
• Occupational Noise Exposure
• Exposure to Dangerous Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts and Mists
• Illumination
• Protective Barriers and Signs
• Fire Protection and Prevention
• Storage of Flammable and Combustible Liquids
• Use and Storage of Explosives
• Use and Care of Hand and Power Tools
• Use and Care of Welding and Cutting Equipment
• Electrical Hazards „
• Construction and Use of Ladders and Scaffoldings
• Use of Mechanical, Hoisting, Lifting and Carrying Devices
• Excavations, Trenching and Shoring
Specific standards for any item in the above list can be obtained from
an appropriate state agency or the U.S. Department of Labor, Washington,
D.C.
10
-------
Section 1
General Conditions
Article 1.100-000-000. Definition of Terms. Whenever used in
these General Conditions or in the other Contract Documents, the follow-
ing terms shall have the meanings indicated, and these shall be applicable
to both the singular and plural thereof:
Agreement. The written agreement between the OWNER and the CON-
TRACTOR, as indicated by the Bid and Bonds.
Application for Payment. The form furnished by the OWNER which
is to be used by the CONTRACTOR in requesting incremental (progress)
payments and which is to include the schedule of values required by
Article 26.1 and an affidavit of the CONTRACTOR. The affidavit shall
stipulate that progress payments theretofore received from the OWNER
on account of the Work have been applied by the CONTRACTOR to
discharge in full all of the CONTRACTOR'S obligations incurred in con-
nection with the work covered by all prior Applications for Payment.
Bid. The offer or proposal of the Bidder submitted on the prescribed
form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed.
Bidder. Any person, firm or corporation submitting a Bid for the Work.
Bonds. Bid, performance, and payment bonds and other instruments of
security, furnished by the CONTRACTOR and his surety in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
Change Order. A written order to the CONTRACTOR signed by the
OWNER authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an
adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued after execu-
tion of the Agreement.
Contract Documents. The Agreement, Specifications, Drawings, Adden-
da (whether or not issued prior to opening of bids or execution of the
Agreement) and Modifications.
Contract Price. The total moneys payable to the CONTRACTOR under
the Contract Documents.
Contract Time. The number of calendar days stated in the Agreement
for the completion of the Work.
CONTRACTOR. The person, firm or corporation with whom the
OWNER has executed the Agreement.
Drawings. The drawings and plans which show the character and scope
of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved
by the Owner and are referred to in the Contract Documents.
11
-------
Field Order. A written order issued by the OWNER or his agent which
clarifies or interprets the Contract Documents in accordance with Article
14.1 or orders minor changes in the work in accordance with Article 20.2.
Modification, (a) A written amendment of the Contract Documents
signed by both parties, (b) a Change Order, (c) a written clarification
or interpretation issued by the OWNER or his agent in accordance with
Article 14.1 or (d) a written order for a minor change or alteration in
the work issued by the OWNER or his representative pursuant to Article
20.2. A Modification may only be issued after execution of the Agree-
ment.
OWNER. A public body or authority, corporation, association, partner-
ship, or individual for whom the Work is to be performed.
Project. The entire construction to be performed as provided in the
Contract Documents.
PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE. The authorized representative of the
OWNER who is assigned to the Project or any parts thereof.
Shop Drawings. All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, brochures, sched-
ules and other data which are prepared by the CONTRACTOR, a Sub-
contractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor and which illustrate the
equipment, material or some portion of the Work.
Specifications. The Instructions to bidders, these General Conditions, the
Special Conditions and the Technical Provisions.
Subcontractor. An individual, firm or corporation having a direct con-
tract with the CONTRACTOR or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of a part of the Work at the site.
Substantial Completion. The date as certified by the OWNER or his
agent when the construction of the Project or a specified part thereof is
sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that
the Project or specified part can be utilized for the purposes for which it
was intended; or if there be no such certification, the date when final pay-
ment is due in accordance with Article 30.3.
Superintendent. Contractor's representative.
Work. Any and all obligations, duties and responsibilities necessary to
the successful completion of the Project assigned to or undertaken by the
CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents, usually including the fur-
nishing of all labor, materials, equipment and other incidentals.
Article 2
Award, Execution of Documents,
Delivery of Bonds, etc.
2.100-000-000. The award of the contract, if it is awarded, will be to
the lowest responsible Bidder whose qualifications indicate that the award
will be in the best interest of the OWNER and whose proposal complies
with all the prescribed requirements. No award will be made until the
12
-------
OWNER has concluded such investigations as he deems necessary to estab-
lish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of the Bidders
to do the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the satis-
faction of the OWNER within the time prescribed. The OWNER reserves
the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder who does not meet such qualifica-
tions to the OWNER'S satisfaction. In analyzing Bids,-xthe OWNER may
take into consideration alternates and unit prices, if requested by the Bid
forms. If the contract is awarded, the OWNER shall give the successful
Bidder written notice of the award within thirty days after the opening
of the Bids.
2.200-000-000. At least three counterparts of the Agreement and of
such other Contract Documents as practicable shall be signed by the
OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. The OWNER shall identify those por-
tions of the Contract Documents not so signed and such identification
shall be binding on both parties. The OWNER and the CONTRACTOR
shall each receive an executed counterpart of the Contract Documents.
2.300—000—000. Simultaneously with the execution of the Agreement,
the CONTRACTOR shall deliver to the OWNER the required Bonds.
2.400—000—000. Failure of the successful Bidder to execute the Agree-
ment and deliver the required Bonds within ten days of the notice of the
award shall be just cause for the OWNER to annul the award and de-
clare the Bid and any guarantee thereof forfeited.
Article 3
Progress and Submission Schedules;
Preconstruction Conference;
Time for Starting the Work
3.100-000-000. Within ten days after execution of the Agreement, the
CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER for approval, an estimated
progress schedule indicating the starting and completion dates of the vari-
ious stages of the Work, and a schedule of Shop Drawing submissions. At
least ten days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment he
shall also submit a schedule of values as required by Article 26.1.
3.200-000-000. Before starting the Work, a conference will be held to
review the above plans and schedules, to establish procedures for handling
Shop Drawings and other submissions; for processing Applications for
Payment; and to establish a working understanding between parties as
to the conduct of the Project. Present at the conference will be the
OWNER, the Project Representative, the CONTRACTOR and the Super-
intendent.
3.300-000-000. Prior to starting the Work the CONTRACTOR shall
furnish the OWNER and PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE certificates of
insurance as required by Article 34.
3.400-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall start the Work within ten
days of the date on which the Agreement is executed and delivered, or
13
-------
on such other date, as may be specified in the Agreement. However, at
the time of the execution and delivery of the Agreement the OWNER may
give the CONTRACTOR a written notice to proceed, stating a different
date on which it is expected that the CONTRACTOR will start the Work,
but such date shall not be more than thirty days after the date of execu-
tion and delivery of the Agreement. A copy of the notice to proceed shall
be sent to the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE. No work shall be done
prior to the date on which the Work is to start.
3.500—000—000. The Contract Time shall commence on the date the
work is to start as provided in Article 3.4.
Article 4
Correlation, Interpretation
and Intent of Contract Documents
4.100—000—000. It is the intent of the Specifications and Drawings to
describe the complete Project to be constructed in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between the
OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. They may be altered only by a Modi-
fication.
4.200—000—000. The Contract Documents are complementary: what is
called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. If the CONTRACTOR
finds a conflict, error or discrepancy in the Contract Documents, he shall
call it to the OWNER'S attention in writing before proceeding with the
Work affected thereby. In resolving such conflicts, errors and discrepancies,
the documents shall be given precedence in the following order: Agree-
ment, Specifications, Drawings. Within the Specifications the order of
precedence shall be as follows: Special Conditions, Instruction to Bidders,
General Conditions, Technical Provisions. Figure dimensions on Drawings
shall govern over scale dimensions, and detailed Drawings shall govern
over general Drawings. Any Work that may reasonably be inferred from
the Specifications or Drawings as being required to produce the intended
result shall be supplied whether or not it is specifically called for. Work,
materials or equipment described in words which when so applied have a
well-known technical or trade meaning shall be deemed to refer to such
recognized standards. The CONTRACTOR assumes full responsibility for
having familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract
Documents, Work, locality, and local conditions that may in any manner
affect the Work to be done.
Article 5
Ownership and Copies of Documents;
Record Documents
5.100—000—000. All specifications, Drawings and copies thereof fur-
nished by the OWNER shall remain his property. They shall not be used
14
-------
on another Project, and with the exception of those sets which have been
furnished in connection with the execution of the Agreement, shall be re-
turned to him on request upon completion of the Project.
5.200-000-000. The OWNER shall furnish to the CONTRACTOR up to
ten copies of the Specifications and Drawings as are reasonably necessary
for the execution of the Work. Additional copies will be furnished, upon
request, at the cost of reproduction.
5.300-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall keep one record copy of all
Specifications, Drawings, Addenda, Modifications, and Shop Drawings at
the site in good order and annotated to show all changes made during the
construction process. These shall be available to the PROJECT REPRE-
SENTATIVE and shall be delivered to him for the OWNER upon comple-
tion of the Project.
Article 6
Work by Others
6.100-000-000. The OWNER may perform additional work related to
the Project by himself, or he may let other direct contracts therefor which
shall contain General Conditions similar to these. The CONTRACTOR
shall afford the other contractors who are parties to such direct contracts
(or the OWNER, if he is performing the additional work himself), reason-
able opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equip-
ment and the execution of work, and shall properly connect and coordinate
his Work with theirs.
6.200-000-000. If any part of the CONTRACTOR'S Work depends for
proper execution or results upon the work of any other contractor (or the
OWNER), the CONTRACTOR shall inspect and promptly report to the
PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE in writing any defects or deficiencies in
such work that render it unsuitable for proper execution and results. His
failure to so report shall constitute an acceptance of the work as fit and
proper for the relationship of his Work except as to defects and deficien-
cies which may appear in the other work after the execution of his Work.
6.300-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting and
patching of his Work that may be required to make its several parts come
together properly and fit to receive or be received by such other work.
The CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting,
excavating or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their
work with the written consent of the OWNER.
6.400—000—000. If the performance of additional work by other con-
tractors or the OWNER is not noted in the Contract Documents prior to
the award of the contract, written notice thereof shall be given to the CON-
TRACTOR prior to starting any such additional work. If the CONTRAC-
TOR believes that the performance of such additional work by the
OWNER or others involves him in additional expense or entitles him to
15
-------
an extension of the Contract Time, he may make a claim therefor as pro-
vided in Articles 21 and 23.
Article 7
Subcontracts
7.100—000—000. Prior to the execution and delivery of the Agreement,
the successful Bidder will submit to the OWNER for acceptance a list of
the names of Subcontractors and such other persons and organizations
(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to
a special design) proposed for those portions of the Work as to which the
identity of the Subcontractors and other persons and organizations must
be submitted as specified in the Contract Documents. Prior to the execu-
tion and delivery of the Agreement, the OWNER shall notify the success-
ful Bidder in writing if the OWNER, after due investigation, has reason-
able objection to any Subcontractor, person or organization on such list.
The failure of the OWNER to make objection to any Subcontractor, per-
son or organization on the list prior to the execution and delivery of the
Agreement shall constitute an acceptance of such Subcontractor, person or
organization. Acceptance of any such Subcontractor, person or organiza-
tion shall not constitute a waiver of any right of the OWNER to reject
defective Work, material or equipment, or Work, material or equipment
not in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents
7.200—000—000. If, prior to the execution and delivery of the Agreement,
the OWNER has reasonable objection to and refuses-to accept any Sub-
contractor, person or organization on such list, the successful Bidder may,
prior to such execution and deliver, either (i) submit an acceptable sub-
stitute without an increase in his Bid Price or (ii) withdraw his bid with-
out forfeiture of his Bid security. If, after the execution and delivery of
the Agreement, the OWNER refuses to accept any Subcontractor, person
or organization on such list, the CONTRACTOR shall submit an accept-
able substitute and the Contract Price shall be increased or decreased by
the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution and an appropriate
Change Order shall be issued; however, no such increase in the Contract
Price shall be allowed in respect to any substitution unless the CON-
TRACTOR has acted promptly and reasonably in submitting a name with
respect thereto prior to the execution and delivery of the Agreement.
7.300-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontrac-
tor (whether initially or as a substitute) against whom the OWNER may
have reasonable objection, nor shall the CONTRACTOR be required to
employ any Subcontractor against whom he has reasonable objection. The
CONTRACTOR shall not make any substitution for any Subcontractor who
has been accepted by the OWNER unless the OWNER determines that
there is good cause for doing so.
7.400-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for all
acts and omissions of his Subcontractor and of persons directly or in-
16
-------
directly employed by them and of persons for whose acts any of them
may be liable to the same extent that he is responsible for the acts and
omissions of persons directly employed by him. Nothing in the Contract
Documents shall create any contractual relationship between any Sub-
contractor and OWNER or any obligation on the part of the OWNER to
pay or to see to the payment of any Moneys due any Subcontractor, ex-
cept as may otherwise be required by law. The OWNER may furnish to
any Subcontractor, to the extent practicable, evidence of amounts paid to
the CONTRACTOR on accounts of specific work done in accordance with
the schedule of values.
7.500—000—000. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and
the identifications of any drawings shall not control the Contractor in
dividing the Work among Subcontractors or delineating the Work to be
performed by any trade.
7.600-000-000. The CONTRACTOR agrees to specifically bind every
Subcontractor to all of the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents. Every Subcontractor, by undertaking to perform any of the
Work, shall thereby automatically be deemed bound by such terms and
conditions.
7.700-000-000. All Work performed for the CONTRACTOR by a Sub-
contractor shall be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between the
CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor which shall contain provisions that
waive all rights the contracting parties may have against one another for
damages caused by fire or other perils covered by insurance provided in
accordance with Article 36, except such rights as they may have to the
proceeds of such insurance held by the OWNER as trustee under Article
36.5. The CONTRACTOR will pay each Subcontractor a just share of any
insurance moneys received by the CONTRACTOR under Article 36.
Article 8
Materials, Equipment and Labor:
Substitute Material or Equipment
8.100-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for ma-
terials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and ma-
chinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water and
sanitary facilities and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the
execution, testing, initial operation and completion of the Work.
8.200-000—000. All materials and equipment furnished under the
contract shall be new. If required by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR
will furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials
and equipment.
8.300-000-000. If it is indicated in the Specifications that the CON-
TRACTOR may furnish or use a substitute that is equal to any material
or equipment specified, and if the CONTRACTOR wishes to furnish or
17
-------
use a proposed substitute, he shall promptly after the award of the con-
tract, make written application to the OWNER for approval of such a
substitute, certifying in writing that the proposed substitute will perform
adequately the duties imposed by the general design, be similar and of
equal substance to that specified, and be suited to the same use and
capable of performing the same function as that specified. No substitute
shall be ordered or installed without the written approval of the OWNER
who shall be the judge of its equality.
Article 9
Patent Fees and Royalties
The CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume
all costs incidental to the use of any invention, design, process or device
which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. He shall
indemnify and hold harmless the OWNER and anyone directly or in-
directly employed by him from and against all claims, damages, losses and
expenses (including attorneys' fees) arising out of any infringement of
such rights during or after completion of the Work, and shall defend all
such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights.
Article 10
Permits, Laws, Taxes and Regulations
10.100-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply
with all laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations applicable to the Work.
If the CONTRACTOR observes that the Specifications or Drawings are at
variance therewith, he shall give the OWNER prompt written notice there-
of, and any necessary changes shall be adjusted by an appropriate Modi-
fication. If the CONTRACTOR performs any Work knowing it to be con-
trary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such
notice to the OWNER, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom.
10.200-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer,
use and other similar taxes required by the law of the place where the
Work is to be performed.
Article 11
Availability of Lands; Physical and
Subsurface Conditions; Reference Points
11.100-000-000. The OWNER shall provide, as indicated in the Con-
tract Documents and not later than the date when needed by the CON-
TRACTOR, the lands upon which the Work is to be done, rights-of-way for
access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of
the CONTRACTOR. Easements for permanent structures or permanent
changes in existing facilities will be secured and paid for by the OWNER,
18
-------
unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. If the CONTRAC-
TOR believes that any delay in the OWNER'S furnishing these lands or
providing such easements entitles him to an extension of the Contract
Time, he may make a claim therefore as provided in Article^ 23. The
CONTRACTOR shall .provide to all additional lands access thereto that may
be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials
and equipment
11.200-000-000. The OWNER shall furnish to the CONTRACTOR
copies of all available boundary surveys and subsurface tests, well logs,
test drilling data and records of existing wells and other excavations that
he may possess.
11.300-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly notify the
OWNER or his representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physi-
cal conditions at the site differing materially from those indicated in the
Contract Documents. The PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE shall promptly
investigate those conditions and advise the OWNER in writing if further
surveys or subsurface tests are necessary. Promptly thereafter, the
OWNER shall obtain the necessary additional surveys and tests and fur-
nish copies to the CONTRACTOR. If the OWNER finds that the results
of such surveys or tests indicate subsurface or latent physical conditions
differing significantly from those indicated in the Contract Documents, a
Change Order shall be issued incorporating the necessary revisions.
11.400-000-000. The OWNER shall establish such general reference
points as in his judgment will enable the CONTRACTOR to proceed with
the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the layout of the
Work and shall protect and preserve the established reference points and
make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the
OWNER. He shall report to the OWNER whenever any reference point is
lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in
grades or locations. The CONTRACTOR shall replace and accurately re-
locate all reference points so lost, destroyed or moved.
Article 12
Use of Premises
12.100-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall confine his equipment,
storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of his employees
to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits, or the requirements of the
Contract Documents, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises
with materials or equipment.
12.200-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall not load or permit any
part of the structure to be loaded with weights that will endanger the
structure, nor shall he subject any part of the Work to stresses or pressures
that will endanger it.
19
-------
Article 13
OWNER'S Status During Construction
13.100-000-000. The OWNER and the CONTRACTOR are those
persons or organizations identified as such in the Agreement and are re-
ferred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and
masculine in gender.
13.200-000-000. The PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE shall be the
OWNER'S representative during the construction period. All instructions
of the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR shall be issued through the PROJ-
ECT REPRESENTATIVE. The duties and responsibilities and the limita-
tions of authority of the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE as the OWNER'S
representative during construction are set forth in Articles 1 through 42
of these General Conditions and shall not be extended without written con-
sent of the OWNER.
13.300-000-000. The OWNER or his representative shall make periodic
visits to the site to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work
and to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with
the Contract Documents. He shall not be required to make exhaustive or
continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work
nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His
efforts shall be directed toward providing assurance for the OWNER that
the completed Project will conform to the requirements of the Contract
Documents, but he shall not be responsible for the CONTRACTOR'S fail-
ure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On
the basis of his on-site observations as an experienced and qualified pro-
fessional, he shall keep the OWNER informed of the progress of the work
and shall endeavor to guard the OWNER against defects and deficiencies
in the Work of contractors.
13.400-000-000. The OWNER shall have authority to disapprove of or
reject Work which is defective; i.e., it is unsatisfactory, faulty or defec-
tive, or does not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents
or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, test or approval pro-
cedure referred to in Article 16.1. He shall also have authority to require
special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Article 19.3,
whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. The
OWNER must disapprove or reject any method of work within ten days of
its initiation or it will be construed to indicate his approval.
13.500-000-000. The OWNER shall provide one or more fulllime Resi-
dent Project Representatives to assist in carrying out the responsibilities at
the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of any
such Resident Project Representative shall be set forth in an exhibit to be
incorporated in the Contract Documents. In the event that his duties and
responsibilities are not set forth in the Contract Documents, they shall be
as specified herein for the OWNER.
20
-------
13.600-000-000. Neither the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE'S author-
ity to act under this Article nor any decision made by him in good faith
either to exercise or not exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty
or responsibility of the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor,
any of their agents or employees or any other person performing any of
the Work.
Article 14
PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE'S
Interpretations and Decisions
14.100-000-000. The PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE shall issue with
reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations (in
the form of drawings or otherwise) as he may deem necessary for the
proper execution of the Work, such clarifications and interpretations to be
consistent with or reasonably inferable from the overall intent of the Con-
tract Documents. If the CONTRACTOR believes that a written clarification
and interpretation entitles him to an increase in the Contract Price, he may
make a claim therefor as provided in Article 21.
14.200-000-000. The PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE shall be the
initial interpreter of the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents
and the judge of the performance thereunder. In his capacity as inter-
preter and judge he will exercise his best efforts to insure faithful per-
formance by both the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. He will not show
partiality to either and shall not be liable for the result of any interpre-
tation or decision rendered in good faith. Claims, disputes and other mat-
ters relating to the execution and progress of the Work or the interpreta-
tion thereof or performance under the Contract Documents shall be re-
ferred initially to the OWNER for decision, which he shall render in writ-
ing within a reasonable time.
14.300-000-000. Either the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR may
demand arbitration with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter
that has been referred to the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE, except any
which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as
provided in Article 31.2. Such arbitration is to be in accordance with
Article 41. However, no demand for arbitration of any such claim, dispute
or other matter shall be made until the earlier of (a) the date on which
the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE has rendered his decision or (b) the
tenth day after the parties have presented their evidence to the PROJECT
REPRESENTATIVE, if he has not rendered his written decision before that
date. No demand for arbitration shall be made later than thirty days after
the date on which the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE rendered his written
decision in respect to the claim, dispute or other matter as to which arbi-
tration is sought; and the failure to demand arbitration within said thirty
days' period shall result in the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE'S decision
21
-------
being final and binding upon the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. If the
PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE renders a decision after arbitration pro-
ceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence but
shall not supersede the arbitration proceedings, except where the decision
is acceptable to the parties concerned.
Article 15
Shop Drawings and Samples
15.100-000-000. After checking and verifying all field measurements,
the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER or his representative for
approval, in accordance with the accepted schedule of Shop Drawings sub-
missions, five copies (or at the OWNER'S option, one reproducible copy)
of all Shop Drawings, which shall have been checked by and stamped with
the approval of the CONTRACTOR and identified as the PROJECT REP-
RESENTATIVE may require. The data shown on the Shop Drawings shall
be complete with respect to dimensions, design criteria, materials of con-
struction, and the like to enable the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE to
review the information as required.
15.200-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall also submit to the OWNER
for approval, with such promptness as to cause no delay in the Work, all
samples required by the Contract Documents. All samples shall have been
checked by and stamped with the approval of the CONTRACTOR, iden-
tified clearly as to material, manufacturer, pertinent catalog numbers,
and the use for which intended.
15.300-000-000. At the time of each" submission, the CONTRACTOR
shall, in writing, call the OWNER'S attention to any deviations that the
Shop Drawings or sample may have from the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
15.400-000-000. The PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE shall check and
approve with reasonable promptness Shop Drawings and samples, but his
checking and approval shall be only for conformance with the design con-
cept of the Project and for compliance with the information given in the
Contract Documents The approval of a separate item, as such, will not
indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. The CON-
TRACTOR shall make any corrections required by the PROJECT REPRE-
SENTATIVE and shall return the required number of corrected copies of
Shop Drawings and resubmit new samples until approved. The CONTRAC-
TOR shall direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted Shop
Drawings to revisions other than those called for by the PROJECT REPRE-
SENTATIVE on previous submissions.
15.500—000—000. No work requiring a Shop Drawing or sample sub-
mission shall be commenced until the submission has been approved by
the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE.
15.600-000-000. The OWNER'S approval of Shop Drawings or sam-
ples shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from his responsibility for any
22
-------
deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the
CONTRACTOR has in writing called the OWNER'S attention to such de-
viations at the time of submission and the OWNER has given written
approval to the specific deviation, nor shall any approval by the OWNER
relieve the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for errors or omissions in
the Shop Drawings.
Article 16
Tests and Inspections
16.100—000—000. If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require
any Work to specifically be inspected, tested, or approved by someone
other than the CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR shall give the OWNER
timely notice of readiness therefor. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the
OWNER the required certificates of inspection, testing or approval. All
such tests, will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the Ameri-
can Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organiza-
tion as may be required by law or the Contract Documents. If any such
Work required so to be inspected, tested or approved is covered up with-
out written approval or consent of the OWNER, it must, if directed by the
PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE, be uncovered for observation at the CON-
TRACTOR'S expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals
shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR unless otherwise provided.
16.200-000-000. Any Work which fails to meet the requirements of
any such test, inspection or approval and any Work which meets the re-
quirements of any such test or approval but does not meet the require-
ments of the Contract Documents shall be considered defective. Such de-
fective Work may be rejected, corrected or accepted as provided in Article
25.
16.300-000-000. Neither observations by the OWNER, nor inspec-
tions, tests or approvals by persons other than the CONTRACTOR shall
relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligations to perform the Work in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Article 17
CONTRACTOR'S
Supervision and Superintendence
17.100-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the
Work efficiently and with his best skill and attention. He shall be solely
responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures
of construction. Before undertaking the Work he shall carefully study and
compare the Contract Documents and check and verify all figures shown
thereon and all field measurements. He shall at once report in writing to
the OWNER any conflict, error or discrepancy which he may discover.
23
-------
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the finished Work
complies accurately with the Contract Documents.
17.200-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall keep on the Work at all
times during its progress a resident superintendent satisfactory to the
OWNER. The superintendent will be the CONTRACTOR'S representative
at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of the CONTRACTOR.
All communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if
given to the CONTRACTOR.
17.300-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably
qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construc-
tion as required by the Contract Documents. He will at all times main-
tain good discipline and order among his employees at the site.
17.400-000-000. The OWNER shall not be responsible for the acts or
omissions of the CONTRACTOR, or any Subcontractors, or any of his
or their agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the
Work.
Article 18
Safety and Protection; Emergencies
18.100-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiat-
ing, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in
connection with the Work. He shall take all necessary precautions for the
safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent darhage,
injury, or loss to:
18.1.100-000-000. All employees on the Work and other persons who
may be affected thereby.
18.1.200-000-000. All the Work and all materials or equipment to be
incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, and,
18.1.300-000-000. Other property at the site or adjacent thereto,
including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and
utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course
of construction.
The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances,
rules, regulations and orders of any public body having jurisdiction for
the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury
or loss. He shall erect and maintain, as required by the conditions and
progress of the Work, all necessary safeguards for safety and protection,
including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards and
promulgating safety regulations. He shall notify owners of adjacent util-
ities when prosecution of the Work may affect them When the use or
storage of explosives or other hazardous materials is necessary for the
prosecution of the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall exercise the utmost care
and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly quali-
fied personnel. All damage, injury or loss to any property referred to in
24
-------
Articles 18.1.2 or 18.1.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part,
by the CONTRACTOR, a Subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be
liable, shall be remedied by the CONTRACTOR, except damage or loss
attributable to the fault of drawings or specifications or to the acts or
omissions of the OWNER or anyone employed by eithet^of them or for
whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault
or negligence of the CONTRACTOR.
18.200-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall designate a responsible
member of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention
of accidents. This person shall be the CONTRACTOR'S superintendent un-
less otherwise designated in writing by the CONTRACTOR to the OWNER.
18.300—000-000. In emergencies affecting the safety of persons or the
Work on property at the site or adjacent thereto, the CONTRACTOR, with-
out special instruction or authorization from the OWNER, is obligated to
act, at his discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. He
shall give the OWNER prompt written notice of any significant changes in
the Work or deviations from the Contract Documents caused thereby, and
a Change Order shall thereupon be issued covering the changes and devi-
ations involved. If the CONTRACTOR believes that additional work done
by him in an emergency which arose from causes beyond his control en-
titles him to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Con-
tract Time, he may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 21 and
23.
Article 19
Access to the Work; Uncovering Finished Work
19.100-000-000. The OWNER and his representatives and other repre-
sentatives of the OWNER shall at all times have access to the Work. The
CONTRACTOR shall provide proper facilities for such access and obser-
vation of the Work and also for any inspection, or testing thereof by
others.
19.200-000-000. If any Work is covered contrary to the request of the
OWNER, it must, if requested by the OWNER, be uncovered for his ob-
servation and replaced at the CONTRACTOR'S expense.
19.300-000-000. If any Work has been covered which the OWNER has
not specifically requested to observe prior to its being covered, or if the
PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE considers it necessary or advisable that
covered Work be inspected or tested by others, the CONTRACTOR, at the
OWNER'S request, will uncover, expose or otherwise make available for
observation, inspection or testing as the OWNER may require, that portion
of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equip-
ment. If it is found that such Work is defective or does not meet the re-
quirements of the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR will bear all
25
-------
the expenses of such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and
testing as the OWNER may require, of that portion of the Work in ques-
tion, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found
that such Work is defective or does not meet the requirements of the Con-
tract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall bear all the expenses of such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of saitsfac-
tory reconstruction, including compensation for additional professional
services, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting all
such costs from the Contract Price. If, however, such Work is found to
be nondefective and meets the requirements of the Contract Documents, the
CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or ex-
tension of the Contract Time directly attributable to such uncovering, ex-
posure, observation, inspection, testing and reconstruction if he makes a
claim therefor as provided in Article 21 and 23.
Article 20
Changes in the Work
20.100-000-000. Without invalidating the Agreement, the OWNER
may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or re-
visions in the Work; these will be authorized by Change Orders. Upon
receipt of a Change Order, the CONTRACTOR will proceed with the Work
involved. All such Work shall be executed under the applicable conditions
of the Contract Documents. If any Change Order causes an increase or
decrease in the Contract Price or an extension or shortening of the Con-
tract Time, an equitable adjustment shall be made as provided in Article
21 or Article 23.
20.200-000-000. The OWNER may authorize minor changes or altera-
tions in the Work not involving extra cost and not inconsistent with the
overall intent of the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by
a Field Order. If the CONTRACTOR believes that any minor change or
alteration authorized by the OWNER entitles him to an increase in the
Contract Price, he may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 21.
20.300-000-000. Additional work performed by the CONTRACTOR
without authorization of a Change Order shall not entitle him to an in-
crease in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, except
in the case of an emergency as provided in Article 18.3 and except as
provided in Articles 16.1, 19.3 and 20.2.
20.400-000-000. The OWNER shall execute any appropriate Change
Order prepared by the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE covering changes
in the Work to be performed as provided in Article 11.3, and Work per-
formed in an emergency as provided in Article 18.3 and any other claim
of the CONTRACTOR for a change in the Contract Time or the Contract
Price which is approved by the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE.
20.500-000-000. It is the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to notify his
surety of any changes affecting the general scope of the Work or change
26
-------
in the Contract Price and the amount of the applicable Bonds shall be ad-
justed accordingly. The CONTRACTOR will furnish proof of such adjust-
ment to the OWNER.
Article 21
Change of Contract Price
21.100-000-000. The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation
payable to the CONTRACTOR for performing the Work. All duties, re-
sponsibilities, and obligations assigned to or undertaken by the CON-
TRACTOR shall be at his expense without change in the Contract Price.
21.200-000—000. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change
Order. If the CONTRACTOR is entitled by the Contract Documents to
make a claim for an increase in the Contract Price, his claim shall be in
writing and delivered to the OWNER within fifteen days of the occurrence of
the event giving rise to the claim. All claims for adjustments in the Con-
tract Price shall be determined by the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE if
the OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree on the amount
involved. Any change in the Contract Price resulting from any such claim
shall be incorporated in a Change Order.
21.300-000—000. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order
or of any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be
determined in one of the following ways:
21.3.100—000—000. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices
contained in the Contract Documents, by application of unit prices to the
quantities of the items involved.
21.3.200—000—000. by mutual acceptance of a lump sum.
21.3.300—000-000. by cost and a mutually acceptable fixed amount for
overhead and profit.
21.3.400—000—000. if none of the above methods is agreed upon, the
value shall lie determined by the OWNER on the basis of costs and a per-
centage for overhead and profit. Costs shall only include labor (payroll,
payroll taxes, fringe benefits, workmen's compensation, etc.), materials,
equipment, and other incidentals diiectly related to the Work involved.
The maximum percentage \\hich shall be allowed for the CONTRAC-
TOR'S combined overhead and profit, shall be as follows:
21.3.4.100—000—000- for all such Work done by his own organization,
the CONTRACTOR may add up to thirty-five percent of his actual net
increase in cost, and
21.3.4.200-000-000. for all such Work done by Subcontractors, each
Subcontractor ma) add up to fifteen percent of his actual net increase in
costs for combined overhead and profit and the CONTRACTOR may add
up to ten percent of the Subcontractor's total for his combined overhead
and profit; provided that no overhead or profit shall be allowed on costs
incurred in connection with premiums for public liability insurance or
other special insurance directly related to such work.
27
-------
In such case and also under Article 21.3.3 the CONTRACTOR shall sub-
mit in form prescribed by the OWNER an itemized cost breakdown to-
gether with supporting data.
21.400-000-000. The amount of credit to be allowed by the CONTRAC-
TOR the OWNER for any such change which results in a net decrease in
cost, shall be the amount of the actual net increase as determined by the
OWNER. When both additions and credits are involved in any one change,
the combined overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of the net
increase, if any.
21.500-000-000. In the event that a test hole or test well is called for in
the contract, the CONTRACTOR may after completion of the test hole or
test well make his own determination of whether or not the final well can
be completed to the expressed intent of the Contract Documents and if
desired terminate the contract and be paid for the test work as specified
in the contract.
21.600-000—000. In the event that a test hole or well is not specified in
the contract, the CONTRACTOR may at his own option and expense elect
to drill a test hole or well. After completion of the test hole or well the
CONTRACTOR may make his own determination of whether or not the
contract well can be completed to the expressed intent of the Contract Docu-
ments and if he desires to terminate the contract. All information obtained
from the test work shall be the property of the CONTRACTOR. However,
the OWNER has the option to purchase the information for the lump sum
or pro rata amount as specified for test hole/abandonment of test hole or
other negotiable means.
Article 22
Cash Allowances
The CONTRACTOR shall include in the Contract Price all allowances
so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered
to be done by such suppliers or Subcontractors and for such sums within
the limit of the allowances as the OWNER may approve. Upon final pay-
ment, the Contract Price shall be decreased as required and an appropriate
Change Order issued. The CONTRACTOR agrees that the original Con-
tract Price includes such sums as he deems proper for costs and profit on
account of cash allowances. No demand for additional cost or profit in
connection therewith will be allowed.
Article 23
Change of Contract Time
23.100-000-000. The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change
Order. If the CONTRACTOR is entitled by the Contract Documents to
make a claim for an extension in the Contract Time, his claim shall be in
writing delivered to the OWNER within ten days of the occurrence of the
28
-------
event giving rise to the claim. All claims for adjustment in the Contract
Time shall be determined by the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE if the
OWNER and the CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree. Any change in
the Contract Time resulting from any such claim shall be incorporated in
a Change Order.
23.200—000—000. The Contract Time shall be extended in an amount
equal to time lost due to delays beyond the control of the CONTRACTOR
if he makes a claim therefor as provided in Article 23.1. Such delays shall
include, but not be restricted to, acts of neglect by any separate contractor
employed by the OWNER, fires, floods, labor disputes, epidemics, ab-
normal weather conditions, or so-called ACTS OF GOD.
23.300-000-000. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of
the essence of the Agreement The provisions of this Article shall not
exclude recovery for damage (including compensation for additional pro-
fessional services) for delay by either party.
Article 24
Neglected Work
If the CONTRACTOR should neglect to prosecute the Work in accord-
ance with the Contract Documents, including any requirements of the
progress schedule, the OWNER, after ten day written notice to the CON-
TRACTOR may, without prejudice to any other remedy he may have,
make good such deficiencies and the cost thereof (including compensation
for additional professional services) shall be charged against the CON-
TRACTOR if the OWNER approves such action. In this event a Change
Order shall be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract
Documents including an appropriate reduction in the Contract Price. If
the payments then or thereafter due the CONTRACTOR are not sufficient
to cover such amount, the CONTRACTOR will pay the difference to the
OWNER.
Article 25
Warranty and Guarantee; Correction
Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work
25.100-000-000. The CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to the
OWNER that all materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise
specified and that all Work shall be of good quality and free from faults
or defects and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Docu-
ments and of any inspections, tests or approvals referred to in Article 16.2.
All unsatisfactory work, all faulty or defective work and all work not con-
forming to the requirements of the Contract Documents or of such inspec-
tions, tests or approvals shall be considered defective. Prompt notice of all
defects shall be given to the CONTRACTOR. All defective Work, whether
or not in place, may be rejected.
29
-------
25.200-000-000. If required by the OWNER prior to approval of final
payment, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to the OWNER,
either correct any defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or
completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by the OWNER, remove it
from the site and replace it with nondefective work. If the CONTRACTOR
does not correct such defective Work or remove and replace such rejected
Work within a reasonable time, as required by written notice from the
PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE, the OWNER may have the deficiency cor-
rected or the rejected Work removed and replaced. All direct or indirect
costs of such correction or removal and replacement, including compensa-
tion for additional professional services shall be paid by the CONTRAC-
TOR, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting all such
costs from the Contract Price. The CONTRACTOR shall also bear the ex-
pense of making good all work of others destroyed or damaged by his
correction, removal or replacement of his defective Work.
25.300-000-000. If, after the approval of final payment and prior to the
expiration of one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such
longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any
applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents, any
Work is found to be defective, the CONTRACTOR shall, promptly and
without cost to the OWNER, and in accordance witlj the OWNER'S writ-
ten instructions, either correct such defective Work, or, if it has been re-
jected by the OWNER, remove it from site and replace it with nondefec-
tive Work. If the CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply with the
terms of such instructions, the OWNER may have the defective Work cor-
rected or the rejected work removed and replaced, and all direct and in-
direct costs of such removal and replacement, including compensation for
additional professional services, shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR.
25.400—000—000. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and
replacement of defective Work, the OWNER prefers to accept it, he may
do so. If such acceptance occurs prior to approval of final payment, a
Change Order shall be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the
Contract Documents, including appropriate reduction in the Contract
Price; or, if the acceptance occurs after approval of final payment, an
appropriate amount shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR.
Article 26
Application for Progress Payments
26.100-000-000. At least ten days prior to submitting the first Applica-
tion for a progress payment, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a schedule
of values of the Work including quantities and unit prices aggregating the
Contract Price. This schedule shall be satisfactory in form and substance
to the OWNER and shall subdivide the Work into component parts in
sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during con-
30
-------
struction. Upon approval of the schedule of values by the OWNER it shall
be incorporated into the form of an Application for Payment furniMied by
the OWNER.
26.200-000-000. At least ten days before each progress payment falls
due (but not more often than once a montk), the CONTRACTOR shall
submit to the OWNER for review the Application for Payment filled out
and signed by the CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed as of the
date of the Application and supported by such data as the OWNER may
reasonably require. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and
equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored
at the site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for
Payment shall also be accompanied by such supporting data, satisfactory
to the OWNER, as will establish the OWNER'S title to the material and
equipment and protect his interests therein, including applicable insur-
ance.
26.300-000-000. The CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that
title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by an Application for
Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, shall have passed to
the OWNER prior to the making of the Application for Payment, free and
clear of all liens, claims, security interests and encumbrances (hereafter
in the General Conditions referred to as "Liens") ; and that no Work,
materials or equipment covered by an Application for Payment shall have
been acquired by the CONTRACTOR or any other person performing the
Work at the site or furnishing materials and equipment for the Project,
subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or encumbrance
thereon is retained by the seller or otherwise imposed by the CONTRACTOR
or such other person.
26.400-000-000. The PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE shall, within
ten days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in
writing his approval of payment and present the Application to the
OWNER, or return the Application to the CONTRACTOR indicating in
writing his reasons for refusing to approve payment. In the latter case,
the CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application. The OWNER will, within ten days of presentation to him of
an approved Application for Payment, pay the CONTRACTOR the amount
approved by the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE.
Article 27
Approval of Payments
27.100-000-000. The PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE'S approval of
any payment requested in Application for Payment shall constitute a
representation by him to the OWNER, based on the PROJECT REPRE-
SENTATIVE'S on-site observations of the Work in progress as an experi-
enced and qualified design professional and on his review of the Applica-
31
-------
tion for Payment and the suporting data, that the Work has progressed to
the point indicated; that, to the best of his knowledge, information and
belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Docu-
ments (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning Project
upon Substantial Completion-, and to the results of any subsequent tests
called for in the Contract Documents and any qualifications stated in his
approval); and that the CONTRACTOR is entitled to payment of the
amount approved. However, by approving any such payment the PROJECT
REPRESENTATIVE shall not thereby be deemed to have represented that
he made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality
or the quantity of the Work, or that he has reviewed the means, methods,
techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction or that he has made
any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the CONTRAC-
TOR has used the moneys paid or to be paid to him on account of the
Contract Price.
27.200-000-000. The PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE'S approval of
final payment shall constitute an additional representation by him to the
OWNER that the conditions precedent to the CONTRACTOR'S being en-
titled to final payment as set forth in Article 30.3 have been fulfilled.
27.300-000-000. The PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE may refuse to
approve the whole or any part of any payment if, in his opinion, he is un-
able to make such representations to the OWNER. He may also refuse to
approve any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evi-
dence or the results of subsequent inspection or tests, nullify any such
payment previously approved, to such extent as may be necessary in his
opinion to protect the OWNER from loss because:
27.3.100-000-000. the Work is defective,
27.3.200—000—000. claims have been filed or there is reasonable evi-
dence indicating the probable filing thereof,
27.3.300-000-000. the Contract Price has been reduced because of
Modifications,
27.3.400-000-000. the OWNER has been required to correct defective
Work in accordance with Article 24, or
27.3.500—000—000. unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work, including
failure to clean up as required by Article 37.
Article 28
Substantial Completion
28.100-000-000. Prior to final payment, the CONTRACTOR may, in
writing to the OWNER, certify that the entire Project is substantially
complete and request that the OWNER or his agent issue a certificate of
Substantial Completion. Within a reasonable time thereafter, the OWNER
and CONTRACTOR will make an inspection of the Project to determine
the status of completion. If the OWNER or his agent does not consider
32
-------
the Project substantially complete, he shall notify the CONTRACTOR in
writing giving his reasons therefor. If the OWNER or his agent considers
the Project substantially complete, he shall prepare and deliver to the
CONTRACTOR a tentative certificate of Substantital Completion which
shall fix the date of Substantial Completion and the responsibilities be-
tween the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR for maintenance, heat and
utilities. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items
to be completed or corrected before final payment, and the certificate shall
fix the time within which such items shall be completed or corrected, said
time to be within the Contract Time. The CONTRACTOR shall have seven
days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which he may make
written objection to the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE as to any provi-
sions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objec-
tions, the OWNER concludes that the Project is not substantially complete,
he may notify the CONTRACTOR in writing, stating his reasons therefor.
If, after seven days and after consideration of the OWNER'S objections,
the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE considers the Project substantially
complete, he shall execute and deliver to the OWNER and the CONTRAC-
TOR a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised list
of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the
tentative certificate as he believes justified after considration of any ob-
jections from the OWNER.
28.200-000-000. The OWNER shall have the right to exclude the
CONTRACTOR from the Project after the date of Substantial Completion,
but the OWNER shall allow the CONTRACTOR reasonable access to com-
plete or correct items on the tentative list.
Article 29
Partial Utilization
Prior to final payment, the OWNER may request the CONTRACTOR in
writing to permit him to use a specified part of the Project which he be-
lieves he may use without significant interference with construction of the
other parts of the Project. If the CONTRACTOR agrees, he shall certify
to the OWNER that said part of the Project is substantially complete and
request the OWNER or his agent to issue a certificate of Substantial Com-
pletion for that part of the Project. Within a reasonable time thereafter the
OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall make an inspection of that part of the
Project to determine its status of completion. If the PROJECT REPRE-
SENTATIVE does not consider that it is substantially complete, he shall
notify the OWNER and CONTRACTOR in writing giving his reasons
therefor. If the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE considers that part of the
Project to be substantially complete, he shall execute and deliver to the
OWNER and CONTRACTOR a certificate to that effect, fixing the date of
Substantial Completion as to that part of the Project, attaching thereto a
tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment
33
-------
and fixing the responsibility between the OWNER and CONTRACTOR
for maintenance, heat and utilities as to that part of the Project. The
OWNER shall have the right to exclude the CONTRACTOR from any part
of the Project which the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE has so certified
to be substantially complete, but the OWNER shall allow the CONTRAC-
TOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative list.
Article 30
Final Payment
30.100-000-000. Upon written notice from the CONTRACTOR that the
Project is complete, the OWNER or his agent shall make a final inspec-
tion with the CONTRACTOR, and the OWNER will notify the CONTRAC-
TOR in writing of any particulars in which this inspection reveals that the
Work is defective. The CONTRACTOR shall immediately make such cor-
rections as are necessary to remedy such defects.
30.200-000-000. After the CONTRACTOR has completed any such cor-
rections to the satisfaction of the OWNER and delivered all maintenance
and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of
inspection and other documents—all as required by the Contract Docu-
ments, he may make application for final payment following the procedure
for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be ac-
companied by such supporting data as the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE
may require, together with complete and legally effective releases or
waivers (satisfactory to the OWNER) of all Liens arising out of the Con-
tract Documents and the labor and services performed and the material and
equipment furnished thereunder. In lieu thereof and as approved by the
OWNER, the CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts or releases in full; an
affidavit of the CONTRACTOR that the release and receipts include all
labor, services, material and equipment for which a lien could be filed,
and that all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness
connected with the Work for which the OWNER or his property might in
any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied; and consent
of the surety, if any, to final payment. If any Subcontractor or supplier
fails to furnish a release or receipt in full, the CONTRACTOR may fur-
nish a bond satisfactory to the OWNER to indemnify him against any
Lien.
30.300—000—000. On the basis of his observation and review of the
Work during construction, his final inspection and his review of the final
Application for Payment—all as required by the Contract Documents, the
PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE shall, within ten days after receipt of the
final Application for Payment, indicate in writing his approval of payment
and present the Application to the OWNER for payment. Otherwise, he
shall return the Application to the CONTRACTOR, indicating in writing
his reasons for refusing to approve the final payment, in which case the
34
-------
CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application. The OWNER shall, within ten days of presentation to him of
an approved final Application for Payment, pay the CONTRACTOR the
amount approved by the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE.
30.400-000-000. If after Substantial Completion of the Work, final
completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the CON-
TRACTOR, and the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE so confirms, the
OWNER shall, upon certification by the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE,
and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due
for the portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining
balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retain-
age stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as re-
quired in Article 33, the written consent of the surety to the payment of
the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted
shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR to the PROJECT REPRESEN-
TATIVE prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be
made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that
it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
Article 31
Waivers of Claims and Continuing Obligations
31.100-000-000. The CONTRACTOR'S obligation to perform the
Work and complete the Project in accordance with the Contract Docu-
ments shall be absolute. Neither approval of any progress or final payment
by the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE, nor the issuance of certificate of
Substantial Completion, nor any payment by the OWNER to the CON-
TRACTOR under the Contract Documents, nor any use or occupancy of
the Project or any part thereof by the OWNER, nor any act of acceptance
by the OWNER nor any failure to do so, nor any correction of faulty or
defective work by the OWNER shall constitute an acceptance of Work not
in accordance with the Contract Documents.
31.200—000—000. The making and acceptance of final payment shall
constitute:
31.2.100-000. a waiver of all claims by the OWNER against the CON-
TRACTOR other than those arising from unsettled Liens, from faulty or
defective work appearing after final payment, or from failure to comply
with the requirements of the Contract Documents, or the terms of any
special guarantees specified therein, and
31.2.200-000. a waiver of all claims by the CONTRACTOR against the
OWNER other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled.
Article 32
Indemnification
32.100-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harm-
less the OWNER and the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE and their agents
35
-------
and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses
including attorneys' fees arising out of or resulting from the performance
of the Work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense (a)
is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to
or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including
the loss of use resulting therefrom and (b) is caused in whole or in part by
any negligent act or omission of the CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor,
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for
whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is
caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder.
32.200-000-000. In any and all claims against the OWNER or any of
his agents or employees by any employee of the CONTRACTOR, any Sub-
contractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or any-
one for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obli-
gation under this Article 32 shall not be limited in any way by any limi-
tation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits pay-
able by or for the CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor under workmen's
compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
32.300-000-000. The obligations of the CONTRACTOR under Article
32 shall not extend to the liability of the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE,
his agents or employees arising out of (a) the preparation or approval of
maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs or
specifications or (b) the giving of or the failing to give directions or in-
structions by the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE, his agents or employees
provided such giving or failing to give is the primary cause of injury or
damage.
Article 33
Contract Bonds
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and payment Bonds as
security for the faithful performance and payment of all his obligations
under the Contract Documents. These Bonds shall be in amounts at least
equal to the Contract Price and in such form and with such sureties as are
acceptable to the OWNER. Prior to execution of the Contract Documents
the OWNER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish such other Bonds,
in such form and with such sureties as he may require. If such Bonds are
required by written instructions given prior to opening of Bids, the pre-
miums shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR; if subsequent thereto, they
shall be paid by the OWNER.
Article 34
CONTRACTOR'S Liability Insurance
The CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will
protect him from claims under workmen's compensation laws, disability
36
-------
benefit laws or other similar employee benefit laws; from claims for dam-
ages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death
of his employees, and claims insured by usual personal injury liability
coverage; from claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or
disease, or death of any person other than his employees including claims
insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; and from claims for
injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use result-
ing therefrom, any or all of which may arise out of or result from the
CONTRACTOR'S operations under the Contract Documents, whether such
operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor or anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any of them or from whose acts any of them may
be legally liable. This insurance shall be written for not less than the
limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law,
whichever is greater, and shall include contractual liability insurance. Be-
fore starting the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall file with the OWNER
certificates of such insurance, acceptable to the OWNER; these certificates
shall contain a provision that the coverage afforded under the policies will
not be cancelled or materially changed until at least fifteen days prior written
notice has been given the OWNER.
Article 35
OWNER'S Liability Insurance
The OWNER shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining his
own liability insurance and, at his option, may purchase and maintain
such insurance as will protect him against claims which may arise from
operations under the Contract Documents.
Article 36
Property Insurance
36.100-000-000. Unless otherwise provided, the OWNER shall pur-
chase and maintain property insurance on the Project to the full insurable
value thereof. This insurance shall include the interests of the OWNER,
the CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors in the Work and shall insure
against the perils of Fire, Extended Coverage, Vandalism and Malicious
Mischief.
36.200-000-000. The OWNER shall purchase and maintain such steam
boiler and machinery insurance as may be required by the Contract Docu-
ments or by law. This insurance shall include the interests of the OWNER,
the CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors in the Work.
36.300—000—000. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance
required by Articles 36.1 and 36.2 is to be adjusted with the OWNER and
made payable to the OWNER as trustee for the insurers, as their interests
may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause
and of Article 36.7.
37
-------
36.400-000-000. The OWNER shall file a copy of all policies with the
CONTRACTOR before an exposure to loss may occur. If the OWNER does
not intend to purchase such insurance, he shall inform the CONTRAC-
TOR in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The CONTRACTOR
may then affect insurance which will protect the interests of himself and
his Subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the
cost thereof shall be charged to the OWNER. If the CONTRACTOR is
damaged by failure of the OWNER to purchase or maintain such insur-
ance and so to notify the CONTRACTOR, then the OWNER shall bear all
reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.
36.500-000-000. If the CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other
special insurance be included in the property insurance policy, the
OWNER will, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof
shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR by appropriate Change Order.
36.600-000-000. The OWNER and CONTRACTOR waive all rights
against each other for damages caused by fire or other perils to the ex-
tent covered by insurance provided under this Article, except such rights
as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the OWNER
as trustee. The CONTRACTOR shall require similar waivers by Subcon-
tractors in accordance with Article 7.7.
36.700-000-000. The OWNER as trustee shall have power to adjust
and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest
shall object in writing within five days after the occurrence of loss to the
OWNER'S exercise of this power, and if such objection be made, arbitra-
tors shall be chosen as provided in Article 41. The OWNER as trustee shall,
in that case, make settlement with the insurers in accordance with the
directions of such arbitrators. If distribution of the insurance proceeds
by arbitration is required, the arbitrators will direct such distribution.
Article 37
Cleaning Up
The CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises free from accumulations of
waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work, and at
the completion of the Work, he shall remove all waste materials, rubbish
and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, construction
equipment and machinery, and surplus materials, and leave the site clean
and ready for occupancy by the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall re-
store to their original condition those portions of the site not designated
for alteration by the Contract Documents.
Article 38
OWNER'S Right to Stop or Suspend Work
38.100-000-000. If the Work is defective, or the CONTRACTOR fails
to supply sufficient skilled workmen or suitable materials or equipment,
38
-------
of if the CONTRACTOR fails to make prompt payments to Subcontractors
or for labor, materials or equipment, the OWNER may order the CON-
TRACTOR to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for
such order has been eliminated.
38.200-000-000. The OWNER, may, at any time and without cause,
suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than
ninety days by notice in writing to the CONTRACTOR and the PROJECT
REPRESENTATIVE which shall fix the date on which Work shall be re-
sumed. The CONTRACTOR shall resume the Work on the date so fixed.
The CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or
an extension of the Contract Time directly attributable to any suspension
if he makes a claim therefor as provided in Articles 21 and 23.
Article 39
OWNER'S Right to Terminate
39.100-000-000. If the CONTRACTOR is adjudged bankrupt or insol-
vent, or if he makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors
without the approval of the OWNER, or if a trustee or receiver is ap-
pointed for the CONTRACTOR or for any of his property, or if he files a
petition to take advantage of any debtors' act, or to reorganize under the
bankruptcy or similar laws, or if he repeatedly fails to supply sufficient
skilled workmen or suitable materials or equipment, or if he repeatedly
fails to make prompt payments to Subcontractors or for labor, materials
or equipment or if he disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or
orders of any public body having jurisdiction, or if he disregards the au-
thority of the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE, or if he otherwise violates
any provision of the Contract Documents, then the OWNER may, without
prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the CONTRAC-
TOR and his surety ten days from the receipt o'f the written notice, termi-
nate the services of the CONTRACTOR and take possession of the Project
and of all materials to be incorporated therein, and finish the Work by what-
ever method he may deem expedient. In such case the CONTRACTOR
shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is
finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct
and indirect costs of completing the Project, including compensation for
additional professional services, such excess shall be paid to the CON-
TRACTOR. If such costs exceed such unpaid balance, the CONTRACTOR
shall pay the difference to the OWNER. Such costs incurred by the
OWNER shall be determined by the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE and
incorporated in a Change Order.
39.200-000-000. Where the CONTRACTOR'S services have been so
terminated by the OWNER, said termination shall not affect any rights of
the OWNER against the CONTRACTOR nor any rights of the CONTRAC-
TOR against the OWNER, then existing or which may thereafter accrue.
39
-------
Any retention or payment of moneys by the OWNER due the CONTRAC-
TOR shall not release the CONTRACTOR from liability.
39.300-000-000. Upon seven day written notice to the CONTRAC-
TOR and the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE, the OWNER may, without
cause and without prejudice to any right or remedy, elect to abandon the
Project and terminate the Agreement. In such case, the CONTRACTOR
shall be paid for all Work executed and any expense sustained plus a
reasonable profit.
Article 40
CONTRACTOR'S Right to Stop Work or Terminate
If, through no act or fault of the CONTRACTOR, the Work'is sus-
pended for a period of more than ninety days by the OWNER or under an
order of court or other public authority, or the PROJECT REPRESENTA-
TIVE fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty days after it
is submitted, or if the OWNER fails to pay the CONTRACTOR any sum ap-
proved by the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE or awarded by arbitrators
within thirty days of its approval and presentation, then the CONTRACTOR
may, upon seven day written notice to the OWNER, terminate the Agreement
and recover from the OWNER payment for all Work executed and any
expense sustained plus a reasonable profit. In addition and in lieu of termi-
nating the Agreement, if the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE has failed to
act on an Application for Payment or if the OWNER has failed to make
any payment as aforesaid, the CONTRACTOR may upon seven days notice
to the OWNER stop the Work until he has been paid all amounts then
due. In this event the CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to an Extra Work
Order for his direct costs incurred during the shutdown, plus ten percent.
Article 41
Arbitration
41.100—000—000. All claims, disputes and other matters in question
arising out of, or relating to, this Agreement or the breech thereof except
for claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final
payment as provided by Article 31.2, shall be decided by arbitration in
accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the Amer-
ican Arbitration Association. This agreement to so arbitrate shall be spe-
cifically enforceable under the prevailing arbitration law. The award
rendered by the arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered
upon it in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
41.200-000-000. Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed in
writing with the other party to the Agreement and with the American
Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed with the OWNER. The
demand for arbitration shall be made within the thirty day period specified
in Article 14.3 where applicable, and in all other cases within a reason-
40
-------
able time after the claim, dispute or other matter in question has arisen,
and in no event shall it be made after institution of legal or equitable pro-
ceedings based on such claim, dispute or other matter in question, which
would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations.
41.300-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and
maintain the progress schedule during any arbitration proceedings, unless
otherwise agreed by him and the OWNER in writing.
Article 42
Miscellaneous
42.100-000-000. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents
requires the giving of written notice it shall be deemed to have been validly
given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm
or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if sent by
registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the business address used
in the advertisement for bids or in the contract documents.
42.200-000-000. All moneys not paid when due hereunder shall bear
interest at the legal rate in force at the place of the Project.
42.300-000-000. The duties and obligations imposed by these General
Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder, and, in partic-
ular but without limitation, the warranties, guarantees and obligations im-
posed upon the CONTRACTOR by Articles 25 and 32 and the rights and
remedies available to the OWNER thereunder, shall be in addition to and
not a limitation of any otherwise imposed or available by law, by special
guarantee or other provisions of the Contract Documents.
42.400-000-000. Should the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR suffer
injury or damage to his person or property because of any error, omis-
sion or act of the other or of any of his employees or agents or others
for whose acts he is legally liable, claim shall be made in writing to the
other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such in-
jury or damage.
42.500-000-000. The Contract Documents shall be governed by the law
of the place of the Project.
42.600-000-000. The full responsibility for design shall be borne by
the OWNER unless specific design responsibility is given to the CON-
TRACTOR elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
41
-------
Section 2
Special Conditions
Article 43
General
The Special Conditions shall supplement and modify the General Con-
ditions and shall govern in the event of conflicts or contradictions between
them and the General Conditions. Commentary: Special Conditions must
be written individually for each project. Items often considered under Spe-
cial Conditions are listed below. Every effort should be made to maintain
consistency between the Special Conditions and General Conditions, but it
is recognized that variations will occur:
A. Scope and General Description of Work to Include Test Hole
Size, Well Size, Depth and Whether it is the Intent to Either Ob-
tain the Maximum Available Production Rate or a Designated
Production Rate, if Indicated Here:
B. Sub-Surface Information
C. Work Schedule
D. Liquidated Damages
E. Special Permits, Taxes, Legal Easements, Property Boundaries,
etc.
F. Location of Existing Utilities
G. Availability of Construction Utilities
H. Specific Insurance Requirements
I. Bond Requirements
J. Submittals
K. Field Office
L. Material Variations
M. Owner's Right to Purchase Test Well
N. Time and Notice of All Tests
0. Material Selection for Casing and Screens (Metallic or Non-metal-
lic)
Article 44
Glossary of Technical Terms
PREAMBLE
Incorporated into these standards are definitions of selected terms.
42
-------
TERMS
Abandoned Well. A well whose original purpose and use- have been
permanently discontinued or which is in such a state of disrepair that its
original purpose cannot be reasonably achieved.
Absorption. The penetration of molecules or ions of one substance into
the interior of a solid or liquid.
Acidising. The process of introducing acid into an acid-soluble forma-
tion for the purpose of enlarging the pore space by dissolving the sur-
rounding formation. Acidizing also refers to the removal of encrustants
from well screen and gravel pack, and dissolving cemented materials.
Adsorption. Attachment on the surfaces of solids of gases, liquids or
dissolved substances with which they are in contact.
Air Line. The smaller vertical air pipe usually extending from the sur-
face submerged to within a few feet of the bottom of the educator pipe.
The fength of the air line below the static water level is used in calculat-
ing the air pressure required to start the air-lift.
Anion. A negatively charged ion or radical.
Annular Space (A).
Outside diameter of
inner wel1 casing = B
Annular Space = A
Inside diameter of
outer wel1 casing
or bore hole * C
C-B
2
Apparent Specific Gravity. The ratio of the weight of a given volume of
dry soil to an equal volume of water under standard conditions.
Aquiclu.de. A porous formation capable of absorbing water but which
will not transmit it fast enough to supply a well.
Aquifer. A geologic formation, group of formations, or part of a forma-
tion that contains sufficient saturated permeable material to yield sig-
nificant quantities of water to wells and springs.
43
-------
Artesian Well. A well in an aquifer where the ground water is confined
under pressure and the water level stands above the top of the confined
water body it taps.
Bailer. A long narrow bucket made of pipe with a valve in the bottom
used to remove cuttings from the hole.
Bailer (piston tube). A type of bailer (or sampler) that is fitted with a
of pipe with a flat bottom check valve for removing earth materials from
the bottom of hole; usually employed with the cable tool method.
Bailer (flat bottom). A type of Bailer (or sampler) that has a length
plunger so that an upward pull op the plunger produces a partial vacuum
that opens a valve and sucks sand or slurried cuttings into the bailer tube.
Bentonite. A highly plastic, colloidal clay composed largely of mineral
montmorillonite.
Bradenhead. A pack-off or seal between two casings.
Cake Thickness. The thickness of filter cake deposited against porous
media by the drilling fluid.
Capillarity. The property of tubes with minute openings which, when
immersed in a fluid, raises or depresses the fluid in the tubes above or
below the surface of the fluid in which they are immersed.
Capillary Fringe. The zone immediately above the water table in which
water is held by capillarity.
Casing. A tubular retaining structure, generally metal, which is installed
in the excavated hole to maintain the well opening.
Centraliaer. Used to center casing in the hole, insuring uniform annular
space for effective grouting.
Cementing (positive emplacement). A technique of installation of
cementing materials whereby emplacement is achieved by positive pressure
extended from the bottom of the zone upward via a grout pipe extending
from the surface.
Clay. A fine-grained inorganic material (grains less than 0.0005 mm in
diameter) which has very low permeability and is plastic.
Coefficient of Transmissibility. The field coefficient of permeability
multiplied by the aquifer thickness in feet. The terms has been replaced
by "transmissivity".
Coefficient of Viscosity. The force required to maintain a unit difference
in velocity between two layers of water a unit distance apart.
Conductor Pipe or Casing. A tubular retaining structure installed
between the drilled hole and the inner casing, in the upper portion of a
well.
Cone of Pressure Relief. An imaginary conical surface of the water
level indicating pressure relief in a confined aquifer due to pumping.
Cone of Depression. The conical surface of the water level created in an
unconfined aquifer due to pumping.
Confined Ground Water. Ground water under pressure significantly
greater than atmospheric pressure; and its upper limit is the bottom of a
44
-------
bed of distinctly lower hydraulic conductivity than that of the material in
which the confined water occurs.
Core (side hole). A sampling device that scrapes the side of existing hole
via a pneumatically operated coring blade removing formation material
as the device is raised up the sampling interval desired. The sample passes
the bladed coring bit and falls into a bag within the core barrel.
Core Bailer. A length of pipe used as a coring device for retrieval of
earth materials from the bottom of the hole. Usually has a spring loaded
"core catcher" at bottom to retain material in core barrel.
Curing Time. Minimum time required for particular types of cementing
or grouting materials to harden (or set up) before drilling or other con-
struction operations can be resumed.
Deep Well. The term "deep" has no real significance relative to the actual
depth of a well. Such usage is eliminated from technical and legal appli-
cations in favor of specific depths.
Domestic Water Supply. One family water supply.
Drawdown. The difference in levels between the static water level and the
surface of the cone of depression.
Drilled Well. A well for which the hole is generally excavated by
mechanical means such as the rotary or cable tool methods.
Drilling Mud. A fluid composed of water and bentonite used in the
drilling (primarily rotary) operation to remove cuttings from the hole, to
clean and cool the bit, to reduce friction between the drill stem and the
sides of the hole, and to plaster the sides of the hole. Such fluids range
from relatively clear water to carefully prepared mixtures of special pur-
pose compounds.
Drive Shoe. A forged steel collar with a cutting edge fastened onto the
bottom of casing to shear off irregularities in the hole as the casing ad-
vances, and to protect the lower edge of the casing as it is driven.
Eductor. The vertical discharge pipe, usually submerged about two-
thirds of its length below the pumping water level in the well.
Electrolyte. A chemical which dissociates into positive and negative ions
when dissolved in water, increasing the electrical conductivity.
Filter Loss. The amount of fluid delivered through a permeable mem-
brane in a specified time.
Filtration Rate. Water loss per unit time.
Gel. A colloidal suspension in which shearing stresses below a certain
value fail to produce permanent deformation.
Gel-Strength. A measure of the ability of colloids to form gels.
Geophysical /Mechanical Logging. Geophysical logging is composed
of a number of techniques that measure some electrical, chemical or radio-
active property of the subsurface, either characteristic of the ground water
or of the rocks in which the ground water occurs. Typical techniques in-
clude: Resistivity and Self-Potential Logging (called Electric Logging,)
Gamma and Neutron Logging (called Radiation Logging), etc. Mechanical
45
-------
Logging incorporates mechanical devices, as opposed to electronic or elec-
tric, that measure some physical property of the subsurface, e.g., Calipef
Logging, Temperature Logging, Photographic Logging, etc. The follow-
ing apply for any and all geophysical/mechanical logs specified in these
Standards (See Article 45. Preamble).
Gravel Packed Well. A well in which filter material is placed in the
annular space to increase the effective diameter of the well, and to pre-
vent fine-grained sediments from entering the well.
Ground Water. Water in the zone of saturation.
Ground Water Divide. A line on a water table on each side of which
the water table slopes downward in a direction away from the line.
Ground Water Mound. A mound-shaped addition to the^ ground water
body built up by seepage, percolation, or recharge.
Ground Water Ridge. A ridge-shaped addition to the ground water
body such as may be built up by an influent stream.
Grout. A fluid mixture of cement and water (neat cement) of a consis-
tency that can be forced through a pipe and placed as required. Various
additives, such as sand, bentonite, and hydrated lime, are included in the
mixture to meet certain requirements. For example, sand is added when a
considerable volume of grout is needed.
Heat of Hydration. The heat evolved during the setting and hardening
of portland cement.
Homogeneous. Material of essentially uniform characteristics of compo-
sition, texture, appearance, etc.
Hydraulic Gradient. The change in static head per unit of distance
in a given direction. If not specified the direction generally is understood
to be that of the maximum rate of decrease in head.
Hydrologic Properties. The properties of rocks which control the
entrance of water, and the capacity to hold and transmit water.
Laminar Flow. Movement of fluid particles in essentially parallel paths.
Lift. The vertical distance from the pumping level to the point of dis-
charge of the water plus the friction loss in the eductor pipe.
Logging. (For Type of See "Geophysical/Mechanical Logging.")
Mechanical Logging. (See "Geophysical/Mechanical Logging.")
Nonhomogeneous. Material of essentially non-uniform characteristics
of composition, texture, appearance, etc.
Packer. A device placed in a well which plugs or seals the well at a
specific point.
Perched Ground Water. Ground water in a saturated zone which is
separated from the main body of ground water by unsaturated rock.
Perforations. A series of openings in a well casing, made either before
or after installation of the casing, to permit the entrance of water into the
well.
Permeability. A measure of the relative ease with which a porous med-
ium can transmit a liquid under a potential gradient. It is a property of
46
-------
the medium alone and is independent of the nature of the liquid and of
the force field causing movement. It is a property of the medium that is
dependent upon the shape and size of the pores.
Telescoping. A method of fitting or placing one casing inside another,
or of introducing screen through a casing diameter larger than the diam-
eter of the screen.
Test Hole. Hole designed to obtain information on ground water quality
and/or geological and hydrological conditions.
Test Well. Well completed for pumping.
Thixotropy. The property of some gels repeatedly to become liquid
on agitation and gelling again at rest.
Transmissivity. The rate at which water of the prevailing kinematic
viscosity is transmitted through a unit width of an aquifer under a unit
hydraulic gradient.
Tremie Pipe. A device, usually a small diameter pipe, that carries
grouting materials to the bottom of the hole and which allows pressure
grouting from the bottom up without introduction of appreciable air
pockets.
Uniformity Coefficient. The uniformity coefficient is a ratio of the
sieve size that will retain 40 percent of the aquifer materials to the effec-
tive size.'The sieve size that retains 90 percent of the aquifer materials is
the effective size.
Water-Cement Ratio. The amount of mixing water in gallons used per
sack of cement.
Water Table. That surface in an unconfined water body at which the
pressure is atmospheric. It is defined by the levels at which water stands
in wells that penetrate the water body just far enough to hold standing
water.
Well Log. (See "Geophysical/Mechanical Logging.")
Well Point. A short length of well screen attached to the lower end of
the pipe installed by driving via repeated blows to the desired position in
an aquifer or in a formation to be dewatered. A forged steel point is
usually attached to the lower end of the screen to facilitate penetration.
Well Screen. Serves as the intake section of the well that obtains water
from an aquifer of unconsolidated materials such as sand. It allows water
to flow freely into the well from water saturated sand, prevents sand from
entering with the water, and serves as a structural retainer to support the
bore hole in unconsolidated material. Numerous types are available and
their application depends on the specific hydrogeologic conditions present.
Zone of Aeration. The zone above the water table in which the inter-
stices are partly filled with air. The term is replaced by "unsaturated
zone". It includes the capillary fringe.
Zone of Saturation. The zone below the water table in which all inter-
stices are filled with ground water.
47
-------
Section 3
Technical Standards
Article 45
Test Holes and Samples
PREAMBLE
The purpose of drilling a test hole is to obtain information on ground-
water quality and formation materials, and to help establish the depth and
extent of the water-bearing formation or formations at a specified site.
Frequently the test hole will be enlarged and cased, becoming the finished
well. This is true with nearly every well constructed by the rotary method
wherein the "pilot hole" is, in effect, a test hole.
When warranted a test hole may be converted into a test well fully
capable of being operated as a permanent production well.
It is recommended that samples be collected of all materials penetrated
by the drilled well. As many samples should be taken as required and by
such means as will assure collection of representative samples of a specific
aquifer(s), or formation(s) that will be free of material from intervals
above the aquifer or formation of interest. The sample may be obtained
with a bailer scow, or by coring or other means, such as return flow sam-
pling. Care must be taken to accurately determine the depth interval from
which each sample is taken.
After final depth is reached, a geophysical log may be required. The
logging shall be done by a logging service or by competent personnel pro-
vided by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the OWNER or his repre-
sentative.
Geophysical logging would include all techniques of lowering sensing
devices into a borehole and recording some physical parameter that may
be interpreted in terms of the characteristics of the rocks, the fluids con-
tained in the rocks, or the construction of the well. It should be the CON-
TRACTOR'S responsibility to conduct any geophysical logging operation
called for in the specifications or to arrange for it unless otherwise directed
by the OWNER or his authorized agent. The interval to be logged should
be the total depth of the borehole subject to satisfactory borehole condi-
tions, the limitations of the logging technique, and/or other directives
from the OWNER or his authorized agent.
Borehole Preparation. When the hole has been drilled to a depth
determined by contractual and/or geological conditions it must be pre-
48
-------
pared for geophysical logging. Borehole preparation shall include, but not
be limited to: (1) continuation of circulation until drill cuttings have been
removed from the borehole and (2) circulation of the drilling mud in the
borehole until it is uniform and the drill pipe has been removed from, the
borehole. The CONTRACTOR must make all reasonable efforts to leave the
borehole free from obstructions in preparation for geophysical logging.
The log(s) must be made immediately following the completion of bore-
hole preparation unless otherwise stated in the contract or so stipulated
by the OWNER or his authorized agent.
Borehole Logging Equipment. If the CONTRACTOR conducts the
operation, it must be his responsibility, unless otherwise stated in the con-
tract or directed by the OWNER, to assure that geophysical/well logging
instruments and equipment used to make the proper log must be in good
condition so as to give an accurate and representative log. It must also
be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to: (1) select vertical scale
units for the log commensurate with the purpose of the log, (2) see that
all logs are recorded at the highest sensitivity that is consistent with a
minimum of off-scale deflection, and (3) see that scales, calibration and
standardization, and other pertinent data are recorded on each log.
If the operation is conducted by a commercial logging service, the above
responsibilities are delegated to that logging service.
Geophysical Log Interpretations. Geophysical log interpretation
should consist of all processes of determining information from geophysi-
cal logs. All geophysical log interpretation must be done by a qualified log
analyst. The log analyst must be able to demonstrate competence through
background, training, and experience when so called upon. It must be the
CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to assure that all log analyses and/or
interpretations are made by a person so qualified.
Spontaneous Potential Log. (self-potential) Records the natural poten-
tial developed between the borehole fluid and the surrounding rock mate-
rials. All spontaneous potential measurements are made in an uncased bore-
hole. Measurements are made in millivolts and millivolts per horizontal
chart width are shown on the log heading, along with the polarity. The
spontaneous potential log may be run in conjunction with resistivity logs
which, collectively, are commonly called an "Electric log".
Resistance Logging. A resistance log measures the resistance, in ohms,
of the earth materials lying between an inhole electrode and a surface
electrode, or between two inhole electrodes. All measurments are made in
an uncased borehole. A resistance log may consist of a single-point, point-
resistance, or single-electrode systems. The number of ohms per horizontal
chart width are indicated on the log heading.
Resistivity Logging. Resistivity logging includes all devices which
measure the electrical resistivity of a known or assumed volume of earth
material under direct application of an electric current or an induced elec-
tric current. Measurements are made in ohm-meters and/or ohm-feet. Mul-
49
-------
tiple-electrode resistivity measurements include such logs as the short and
long normal, lateral, focused, well resistivity, microfocused, and induction.
Trade names applied to these logs can be substituted for the generic log
types provided the generic type is referenced.
Natural-Gamma Logging. Records of the amount of natural-gamma
radiation emitted by earth materials are called natural-gamma logs.
Natural-gamma radiation measuring devices include thallium-activated so-
dium iodide crystals (scintillator) and Geiger-Mueller (G—M) tubes. Meas-
urements are made in counts per second or seconds per count and should
be related to API gamma-ray units and to a field standard in which the
response of the logging equipment is checked periodically.
Accoustical Logging. An accoustic log (sonic log) is a record of the
transit time of an acoustic pulse between transmitters and receivers in a
probe. Measurements are recorded in microseconds per foot. Calibration
points appear on the log preferably before and after the run, as an indi-
cation of the uphole system drift.
Caliper-Logging. A record of the average borehole diameter is called
a caliper log. Measurements are made with a probe employing three or
more arms or feelers hinged at the upper end and maintained against the
hole wall by springs. Calibration to a known diameter is made before and
after a run. Measurements are recorded in the inch-foot and/or metric
system, and are so designated on the log heading.
Temperature Logging. The continuous record of the temperature of the
environment immediately surrounding a sensor in a borehole is called
temperature log. Where possible, a temperature log should be run simul-
taneously with a differential-temperature log. Sensors are calibrated with
an accurate thermometer in a stabilized fluid bath. Measurements are re-
corded in degrees Centigrade or Fahrenheit. The run number and the
direction of the probe during logging, up or down, appear on all logs.
Fluid-Movement Logging. Fluid-movement logging include all tech-
niques for measuring natural and/or artificially induced flow within a
single borehole. Devices used to measure the vertical and horizontal com-
ponents of flow in a single borehole may include impeller flowmeters,
thermal flowmeters, and various systems for injecting and detecting radio-
active and chemical tracers. Measurements shall be made in the inch-foot
and/or metric systems per unit of time, or in graphic form showing per-
centage of flow past any given point. A caliper log should be made in con-
junction with any fluid-movement log.
Photographic Logging. A photographic log records on photographic
film, videotape, and/or prints made therefrom, the environment in a cased,
uncased, or screened borehole or any combination thereof. The photo-
graphic record is made in two and/or three dimensions and may be in
color or black and white. Photographs should be spaced covering a mini-
mum five foot interval of well or borehole unless otherwise stipulated in
50
-------
the contract or by the OWNER or his authorized agent. All photographs shall
be marked as to depth below ground surface.
HOLE LOCATION AND PURPOSE
f45.100-000-000. Hole Location and Purpose. The CONTRACTOR
is to construct a test hole at to obtain information regard-
ing the depth, thickness and water-yielding potential of the formations en-
countered. Geographic location shall be stated in terms of coordinates such
as quarter section, township, and range, or by other suitable description
relative to fixed reference points.
DRILLING METHODS
45.010-000-000. Contractor's Choice. The CONTRACTOR shall
provide all equipment that will assure proper execution of the test drilling
and sampling program specified herein. (Selected from Article 46.100—000—
000.)
45.020-000-000. Driven Well Point Method. A driven well point
shall be used.
45.030-000-000. Jetting or Hydraulicing Method. The test hole
shall be drilled by the Jetting or Hydraulicing Method. The CON-
TRACTOR shall provide sufficient water supply from a source approved by
the OWNER and a pump or pumps to properly operate the equipment.
45.040-000-000. Reverse Hydraulic Rotary Method. The test
hole shall be drilled using the Mudless Reverse Rotary Method. The CON-
TRACTOR shall provide sufficient water supply from a source approved
by the OWNER and a pump or pumps to properly operate the equipment.
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for designing and controlling a
drilling program that conforms to sampling method requirements in ac-
cordance with Article 45.000—000—010 (Formation Sample Size Handling
and Identification).
45.050-000-000. Air Rotary Method. The test hole shall be drilled
using the Hydraulic Air Rotary method. The CONTRACTOR shall be re-
sponsible for designing and controlling a drilling program that conforms
to sampling method requirements in accordance with Articles 45.000—000—
010 (Formation Sample Size, Handling and Identification).
45.060-000-000. Rotary Method. The test hole shall be drilled
using the Hydraulic Mud Rotary method. The CONTRACTOR shall be
responsible for designing and controlling a drilling program that conforms
to sampling method requirements in accordance with Article 45.000—000—
010 (Formation Sample Size, Handling and Identification).
45.070-000-000. Combined Driving and Drilling Method. The
test hole shall be constructed by driving and drilling. In unconsolidated
formations alternate driving of casing and bailing is anticipated followed
by drilling in consolidated formations, when encountered.
Note: t Indicates fill-in is required.
51
-------
f45.080-000-000. Cable Tool Method. The test hole shall be drilled
by the Cable Tool method. In unstable unconsolidated formations the hole
shall be advanced by driving the casing and bailing, and no sample shall
be taken except when the casing has been driven ahead of the bottom of
the hole; or in stable unconsolidated formations, samples shall be taken
by drilling feet and bailing before or after driving the cas-
ing to the bottom of the drilled interval. In consolidated formations, the
hole is advanced by drilling and samples by bailing. Casing may be run
later to insure that the hole does not cave. The CONTRACTOR shall be re-
sponsible for designing, controlling, and carrying out a drilling program
that conforms to sampling method requirements in accordance with Articles
45.000-000-010.
DRILLER'S LOGS AND REPORTS
45.001-000-000. Driller's Log. During the drilling of the test hole
the Contractor shall prepare and keep a complete log setting forth, the
following:
1. The reference point for all depth measurements.
2. The depth at which each change of formation occurs.
3. The depth at which the first water was encountered.
4. The depth at which each stratum was encountered.
5. The thickness of each stratum.
6. The identification of the material of which each stratum is com-
posed, such as:
a. Clay
b. Sand or Silt
c. Sand and Gravel—Indicate whether gravel is loose, tight,
angular or smooth; color.
d. Cemented formation—Indicate whether grains (if present)
have natural cementing material between them; e.g. silica,
calcite, etc.
e. Hard rock—Indicate whether sedimentary bedrock, or igneous
(granite-like, basalt-like, etc.)
7. The depth interval from which each water and formation sample
was taken.
8. The depth at which hole diameters (bit sizes) change.
9. The depth to the static water level (SWL) and changes in SWL
with well depth.
If a test well is constructed the CONTRACTOR shall also report:
10. Total depth of completed well.
11. Any and all other pertinent information for a complete and ac-
curate log, e.g., temperature, pH and appearance (color) of any
water samples taken.
12. Depth or location of any lost drilling fluids, drilling materials or
tools.
52
-------
13. The depth of the surface seal, if applicable.
14. The nominal hole diameter of the well bore above and below cas-
ing seal.
15. The amount of cement (number of sacks) installed for the seal,
if applicable.
16. The depth and description of the well casing.
17. The description (to include length, diameter, slot sizes, material,
and manufacturer) and location of well screens, or number, size
and location of perforations.
18. The sealing off of water-bearing strata, if any, and the exact
location thereof.
45.002-000-000. Daily Driller's Report. During the drilling of the
test hole or its conversion into a test well, a daily, detailed driller's report
shall be maintained and delivered upon request to the OWNER or his repre-
sentative at the well site. The report shall give a complete description of
all formations encountered, number of feet (meters) drilled, number of
hours on the job, shutdown due to breakdown, the water level in the well
at the beginning and end of each shift, water level at each change of
formation if readily measurable with the drilling method used, feet of
casing set, and such other pertinent data as may be requested by the
OWNER or his representative. In rotary drilling, the fluid level in the hole
should be measured daily prior to starting pumps.
Driller's Log. During the drilling of the test hole the CONTRACTOR
shall prepare and keep a complete log setting forth the following:
1. The reference point for all depth measurements.
2. The depth at which each change of formation occurs.
3. The depth at which the first water was encountered.
4. The depth at which each stratum was encountered.
5. The thickness of each stratum.
6. The identification of the material of which each stratum is com-
posed, such as:
a. Clay
b. Sand or Silt
c. Sand and Gravel—Indicate whether gravel is loose, tight,
angular or smooth; color.
d. Cemented formation—Indicate whether grains (if present)
have natural cementing material between them, e.g. silica,
calcite, etc.
e. Hard rock—Indicate whether sedimentary bedrock, or igneous
(granite-like, basalt-like, etc.)
7. The depth interval from which each water and formation sample
was taken.
8. The depth at which hole diameters (bit sizes) change.
9. The depth to the static water level (SWL) and changes in SWL
with well depth.
53
-------
If attest well is constructed the CONTRACTOR shall also report:
10. Total depth of completed well.
11. Any and all other pertinent information for a complete and ac-
curate log; e.g., temperature, pH, and appearance (color) of any
water samples taken.
12. Depth or location of any lost drilling fluid, drilling materials or
tools.
13. The depth of the surface seal, if applicable.
14. The nominal hole diameter of the well bore above and below cas-
ing seal.
15. The amount of cement (number of sacks) installed for the seal,
if applicable.
16. The depth and description of the well casing.
17. The description (to include length, diameter, slot sizes, material,
and manufacturer) and location of well screens, or number, size
and location of perforations.
18. The sealing off of water-bearing strata, if any, and the exact lo-
cation thereof.
45.003-000-000. Penetration Rate Log. During the drilling of the
hole, a time log shall be kept showing the actual penetration time required
to drill each foot of hole. The types of bits used in each portion of the
hole shall be noted in this log—drag, roller, button or percussion type and
whether designed for soft, medium, or hard formations, together with ap-
proximate weight on the bits during the drilling of the various types of
formations in the various sections of the hole.
Driller's Log. During the drilling of the test hole the CONTRACTOR
shall prepare a complete log setting forth the following:
1. The reference point for all depth measurements.
2. The depth at which each change of formation occurs.
3. The depth at which the first water was encountered.
4. The depth at which each stratum was encountered.
5. The thickness of each stratum.
6. The identification of the material of which each stratum is com-
posed, such as:
a. Clay
b. Sand or Silt
c. Sand and Gravel—Indicate whether gravel is loose, tight,
angular or smooth; color.
d. Cemented formation—Indicate whether grains have natural
cementing material between them; e.g., silica, calcite, etc.
e. Hard rock—Indicate whether sedimentary bedrock or igneous
(granite-like, basalt-like, etc.)
7. The depth interval from which each water and formation sample
was taken.
8. The depth at which hole diameters (bit sizes) change.
54
-------
9. The depth to the static water level (SWL) and changes in SWL
with well depth.
If a test well is constructed the CONTRACTOR shall also report:
10. Total depth of completed well.
11. Any and all other pertinent information for a complete and ac-
curate log; e.g.1, temperature, pH, and appearance (color) of any
watfir samples taken.
12. Depth or location of any lost drilling fluid, drilling materials or
tools.
13. The depth of the surface seal, if applicable.
14. The nominal hole diameter of the well bore above and below
casing seal.
15. The amount of cement (number of sacks) installed for the seal,
if applicable.
16. The depth and description of the well casing.
17. The description (to include length, diameter, slot sizes, material,
and manufacturer) and location of well screens or number, size
and location of perforations.
18. The sealing off of water-bearing strata, if any, and the exact lo-
cation thereof.
Daily Driller's Report. During the drilling of the test hole or its con-
version into a test well, a daily, detailed driller's report shall be main-
tained and delivered upon request to the OWNER or his representative at
the well site. The report shall give a complete description of all formations
encountered, number of feet (meters) drilled, number of hours on the job,
shutdown due to breakdown, the water level in the well at the beginning
and end of each shift, water level at each change of formation if readily
measurable with the drilling method used, feet of casing set, and such other
pertinent data as requested by the OWNER or his representative. In rotary
drilling, the fluid level in the hole should be measured daily prior to start-
ing pumps.
45.004-000-000. Stratigraphic Log. The stratigraphic log shall
be prepared by a qualified geologist to accompany the set of drilling sam-
ples, noting depth, strata thickness, lithology, including size, range and
shape of constituent particles, smoothness, rock type, rate of penetration,
and such special notes as might be helpful. The material will be described
according to one of the standard size grade scale shown in Table 1.
Driller's Log. During the drilling of the test hole the CONTRACTOR
shall prepare a complete log setting forth the following:
1. The reference point for all depth measurements.
2. The depth at which each change of formation occurs.
3. The depth at which the first water was encountered.
4. The depth at which each stratum was encountered.
5. The thickness of each stratum.
55
-------
Table 1
VARIOUS SIZE GRADE SCALES IN COMMON USE
^ German Scale' USDA and
Udden-Wentworth values (after Altcrbcrg) Soil Sci. Soc. Amcr.
U.S. Corp^ I'.ng.,
Depl. Army and Bur.
Reclamation1
Cobbles
64mm
Pebbles
4mm
Granules
,
Very coarse sand
1mm _
Coarse sand
0.5 mm
Medium sand
0.25 mm
Fine sand
0.125 mm
Very fine sand
0.0625 mm
Silt
0.0039 mm
Clay
(Blockwcrk)
— 200mm —
-6
Gravel
(Kie*)
-2
, „
Sand
1
2
3
4 —0.0625mm—
Silt
8
— 0.002 mm —
Clay
(Ton)
Cobbles
on
Gravel
,
Very coarse sand
Coarse sand
0.5mm
Medium sand
0.25 mm
Fine sand
0.10 mm
Very fine s*nd
0.05 mm— —
Silt
0.002 mm
Clay
Boulders
i/i :_
Cobbles
i :n
Gravel
Coarse sand
IA nuut-
Medium sand
40 mesh— -
Fine sand
— —200 mesh— —
Fine*
t Subdivision] of sand sizes omitted.
J Mesh numbers ire Tor U.S. Standard Sieves: 4 mesh - 4.76 mm, 10 mesh
• 0.42 mm, 200 mesh - 0.074 mm.
2.00mm. 40 muh
56
-------
6. The identification of the material of which each stratum is com-
posed, such as:
a. Clay
b. Sand or Silt
c. Sand and Gravel—Indicate whether gravel is loose, tight,
angular or smooth; color.
d. Cemented formation—Indicate whether grains have natural
cementing material between them; e.g., silica, calcite, etc.
e. Hard rock—Indicate whether sedimentary bedrock or igneous
(granite-like, basalt-like, etc.)
7. The depth at which each sample was taken.
8. The depth at which hole diameters (bit sizes) change.
9. The depth to the static water level (SWL) and changes in SWL
with well depth.
If a test well is constructed the CONTRACTOR shall also report:
10. Total depth of completed well.
11. Any and all other pertinent information for a complete and ac-
curate log; e.g., temperature, pH, and appearance (color) of any
water samples taken.
12. Depth or location of any lost drilling fluid, drilling materials or
tools.
13. The depth of the surface seal, if applicable.
14. The nominal hole diameter of the well bore above and below cas-
ing seal.
15. The amount of cement (number of sacks) installed for the seal,
if applicable.
16. The depth and description of the well casing.
17. The description (to include length, diameter, slot size, material,
and manufacturer) and location of well screens, or number, and
size and location of perforations.
18. The sealing off of water-bearing strata, if any, and the exact lo-
cation thereof.
Daily Driller's Report. During the drilling of the test hole or its con-
version into a test well, a daily, detailed driller's report shall be maintained
and delivered upon request to the OWNER or his representative at the well
site. The report shall give a complete description of all formations en-
countered, number of feet (meters) drilled, number of hours on the job,
shutdown due to breakdown, the water level in the well at the beginning
and end of each shift, the water level at each change of formation if read-
ily measurable with the drilling method used, feet of casing set, and such
other pertinent data as requested by the OWNER or his representative. In
rotary drilling, the fluid level in the hole should be measured daily prior to
starting pumps.
Penetration Rate Log. During the drilling of the hole, a time log shall
be kept showing the actual penetration time required to drill each foot of
57
-------
hole. The types of bits used in each portion of the hole shall be noted in
this log—drag, roller, button or percussion type and whether designed for
soft, medium or hard formations, together with approximate weight on
the bits during the drilling of the various types of formations in the vari-
ous sections of the hole.
GEOPHYSICAL/MECHANICAL LOGS
t45.000-100-000. Geophysical/Mechanical Logs. When called for
under the provisions of the contract the CONTRACTOR shall perform or
have performed the following logs: , , ,
, , , which shall meet all appro-
priate specifications defined in Article 44 under "Geophysical/Mechanical
Logs".
A. Spontaneous-Potential Logging
B. Resistance Logging
C. Resistivity Logging
D. Natural-Gamma Logging
E. Acoustic Logging
F. Caliper Logging
G. Temperature Logging
H. Fluid-Movement Logging
I. Photographic Logging
FORMATION SAMPLING METHODS
45.000-010-000. Contractor's Choice. The method of sampling will
be left to the discretion of the CONTRACTOR; however, he must collect,
identify and store representative samples in accordance with Article 45.00—
000—010, collected with sufficient frequency and at sufficient increments
of depth to permit a thorough evaluation of the water-bearing properties
of the formations encountered in drilling the test hole.
45.000-020-000. Return Flow Method (Continuous). A return
flow sample shall be taken by removing from the circulating drilling fluid
a representative sample of the formation by either collecting same in a
cutting sample box, a "shale shaker", a baffle in a ditch, or catching it in
a bucket and allowing the sample to settle out. Provision shall also be
made to obtain a record of circulation time and probable depth of the
formation from which the cuttings are derived. Drill cutting samples col-
lected at specified depth intervals shall be placed in approved containers
and identified as specified in Article 45.000—000—010. The samples shall
be stored in a safe place by the CONTRACTOR.
f45.000-030-000. Return Flow Method (Circulated). A return
flow sample shall be taken by removing from the discharge fluid a repre-
sentative sample of the formation by either collecting same in a cutting
sample box, a "shale shaker", a baffle in a ditch, or catching it in a bucket
and allowing the sample to settle out. The penetration of the bit shall stop
58
-------
when the bottom of the sampling interval is reached for such time as is
required for all the cuttings to move from the last drilled section of the
hole and settle at the sampling point. The return ditch and sample catch-
ing device shall be cleaned of all cuttings after each sample is taken. A
cutting sample shall be carefully collected from the sampling point. Drill
cutting samples collected at specified depth intervals shall be taken by the
CONTRACTOR. The total sample obtained from each interval shall be
mixed and quartered until sufficient sample remains to furnish
(number) . (volume), representative samples. Drill cuttings
shall be placed in approved containers and identified as specified in Article
45.000-000—010. The samples shall be stored in a safe place by the
CONTRACTOR.
45.000—040—000. Auger Method. Formation samples obtained using
the auger method are to be representative of the formation being pene-
trated. The' samples will be collected, placed in approved containers, and
stored in a safe place by the CONTRACTOR.
f 45.000-050-000. Bailer Method. In clay and consolidated forma-
tions the sample shall be taken by bailing the hole clean then advancing
the drill bit and collecting cuttings. In sand and gravel the sample shall
be taken by driving casing ahead of the drill bit then bailing with a flat
bottom or suction bailer. In stable unconsolidated formations, samples
shall be taken by drilling feet and bailing before and after
driving the casing to the bottom of the drilled interval.
f45.000-060-000. Core Barrel Method. A core barrel shall be ad-
vanced, by being rotated or driven, its full length into the undisturbed
formation. Once the core barrel has penetrated the desired interval, it shall
be withdrawn and the core recovered and stored in a suitable core con-
tainer. A core recovery of less than percent will not be ac-
ceptable.
f45.000-070-000. Piston Tube Method. A piston tube sampler shall
be driven into the undisturbed material at the bottom of the drilled hole
to take formation core samples. This method is used to prevent the mate-
rial in the core from expanding and to assure that the full core be held
securely as the sampler is removed from the test hole. The cores are to be
a minimum of inches in diameter and inches
in length. Upon removal to the surface the sample is to be capped and
sealed in its tube, placed in a sample box and stored in a safe place by
the CONTRACTOR.
45.000-080-000. Split Spoon Method. A steel cylinder shall be
driven vertically into the undisturbed formation at the bottom of the
drilled hole. The cylinder will be returned to the surface and transferred
to a suitable core container. No sample recovery of less than 50 percent
will be accepted.
f45.000-090-000. Side-Hole Core Method. Formation samples will
be taken using a .—_ . inch diameter side-hole core sampler. This
59
-------
unit must be set at depths as directed in such a way as to assure penetra-
tion of the hole wall to a sufficient depth to provide a recovery of a
inch-long core. Side-hole cores will be taken after geophysi-
cal logs have been made, at depths specified by the OWNER or his repre-
sentative. The samples shall be placed in a suitable container and iden-
tified as specified in Article 45.000-000-010, and stored by the CON-
TRACTOR.
FORMATION SAMPLING INTERVAL
145.000-001-000. Sampling by Formation Interval. Formation
samples are to be taken starting at (specify depth, static
water level, bottom of clay, etc.) for each formation change and continu-
ing to (a specified depth or total depth of the test hole).
Special care shall be taken in collecting samples from expected producing
zones.
f45.000—002—000. Sampling by Measured Intervals. Formation
samples are to be taken at foot ( meter) inter-
vals. Special care shall be taken in collecting samples from expected pro-
ducing zones, wherein samples shall be taken at foot
( meter) intervals.
f45.000-003-000. Sampling by Measured and Formation Inter-
val. Formation samples shall be collected each foot (
meter), starting at , and at any pronounced change of for-
mation. Special care shall be used for collecting samples from zones that
are expected to be producing zones, wherein samples shall be collected at
foot ( meter) intervals.
WATER (AQUIFER) SAMPLING
45.000-000-100. Water Sampling. Water samples shall be taken
for analysis from each aquifer. Samples shall be obtained in the following
manner:
1. A well, in a consolidated formation shall be equipped with an
assembly which includes an inner perforated pipe with the bottom
plugged and packers located above and below the target aquifer.
The inner pipe shall then be pumped at a rate of at least 10 GPM
until a clear sample is obtained for analysis. This step shall be
repeated for each aquifer.
2. A well, in unconsolidated formations, shall be equipped with an
assembly which consists of a wound screen 2 feet in length set
opposite each potential aquifer. Gravel is to be placed around
the screen or clear water is to be pumped via reverse normal flow
through the screen to cause the formation to collapse on the
screen; or, a well point shall be driven into the undisturbed
aquifer. Water shall then be pumped at 10 or more GPM until
clear, at which time a sample shall be taken. This shall be repeated
for each aquifer intended for use.
60
-------
The OWNER or his agent may require, for reasons of inferior water qual-
ity, etc., the sealing or walling off of an aquifer in screened wells or he
may, by special price agreement, require specified aquifers cemented off
in non-screened wells. Samples obtained by air pumping of any type will
not be acceptable.
FORMATION SAMPLE SIZE,
DANDLING AND IDENTIFICATION
f45.000—000—010. Size of Sample, Containers, Identification,
Storage and Transfer.
Size of Sample
(number) (volume) representative sam-
ples shall be obtained from each sampling interval. In most instances more
cuttings will be recovered than required. The total volume of cuttings shall
be thoroughly mixed and quartered until the number of volume of sam-
ples required are obtained as a residual.
Containers
*
Immediately after retrieval, formation samples shall be placed in ap-
proved containers, securely closed to avoid spillage and contamination,
and clearly labeled with the following information:
1. Location of the well
2. Name or number of the well
3. Depth interval represented by the sample
4. Date taken
5. Time taken
Identification, Storage and Transfer
Formation samples, immediately after being placed in container, shall
be labeled clearly, either directly on the container or on a tag attached
thereto, using ink, indelible pencil, or other medium that is resistant to
moisture and sunlight. The label shall not be readily removable from the
container. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safe storage of
formation samples until such times as they are accepted by the OWNER.
Time, place, and mode of delivery shall be as directed by the OWNER.
For wells which may or will utilize screens, the CONTRACTOR shall ob-
tain additional samples as required in water-bearing formations for analysis
by a laboratory or screen manufacturer. Duplicate samples shall be re-
tained in a safe place until the results of the analysis are received.
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR TEST HOLES
AND SAMPLES
45.000-000-001. Method of Payment.
Option A (Lump Sum): All of the work performed under this Article
(45) shall be paid for as a lump sum.
61
-------
Option B (Time and Material): All of the work performed under this
Article (45) shall be paid for on the basis of the price bid for well con-
struction equipment per hour plus material at its cost plus percent of add-
on bid.
Option C (Unit Price): All of the following work performed under this
Article (45) shall be paid for at the unit price bid per hour for well con-
struction equipment plus the cost of any materials and/or subcontracted
services at the invoice price plus percent of add-on bid.
a. Test Hole Construction Per Foot
b. Geophysical/Mechanical Logs Unit Price/Foot
c. Stratigraphic Logs Lump Sum
d. Formation Sampling (Per Sample) Unit Price
e. Water Sampling (Per Sample) Unit Price
f. Services of Log Analyst Lump Sum
Article 46
Well Construction
PREAMBLE jt
The CONTRACTOR/OWNER or his Representative, through the use of
information gathered by geophysical methods and/or existing local well rec-
ords and/or the previous drilling of a test hole on the site of the production
well, can determine the type of well needed to obtain the amount of water
required. This knowledge of the character and depth of the producing zone
and of the overlying formations will allow the choice of the construction
method best suited to the type well required.
In determining the procedure to be followed in constructing a well there
are two factors that predominate and must be considered before detailed
planning can continue. These factors are the type well desired, and the
method of its construction. Following are the types of wells and the methods
to be used for their construction.
For the purpose of these standards the types of wells are defined as
follows:
Vnconsolidated Formation Pit Well (Bored or Dug Well), This
large-diameter well is built to obtain water from the unconsolidated ma-
terials that normally occur in the first 50 to 100 feet (15 to 30 m) beneath
the surface. In this type well, which may range from 3 to 20 feet (1 to 6
m) in diameter and 10 to 100 feet (3 to 30 m) in depth, the walls of the
hole are curbed (lined) in such a way as to prevent cave-in of the walls
yet still allow seepage of ground water into the well bore to produce a
reservoir of water. It is ordinarily constructed by digging or boring.
The Radial Collector Type Well. This type is a variant of the dug
well, and usually consists of a concrete shaft or caisson from which hori-
zontal intake pipes project radially. Because of their size (diameter three
feet and larger, and intake pipes 100-500 feet long) and the fact that
62
-------
they can require specialized structural design, construction of radial col-
lector wells will not be covered by these standards; however, use of these
wells when applicable, is acceptable.
Vnconsolidated Formation Natural Filter Well. This type of well
is built to obtain water at various depths from unconsolidated formations
which can be stabilized naturally by development following the installation
of the casing and screen. A well of this.type may be constructed by jet-
ting, boring, driving, drilling or a combination of methods.
Vnconsolidated Formation Artificial Filter Well. This type of well
is built to obtain water at various depths from unconsolidated formations
that cannot be stabilized by the use of a casing/screen combination and
development only, but in addition requires the use of a material that is
coarser than the formation material in the screened interval. This added
material acts as an additional screen to prevent the fine aquifer materials
from entering the well. This type of well may be constructed by boring,
driving, or drilling, or a combination of two or more of these methods.
This type of construction is also essential in some large-diameter wells
drilled with bucket augers or reverse-circulation rotary drilling methods.
Consolidated Formation Open Borehole Partially Cased Well.
This type of well is built to obtain water at various depths from consoli-
dated formations, either fractured or unfractured. It is not cased or
screened in the producing zone for no formation stabilization or filtering
is needed, but may be cased through the formations above the producing
zone, if they are unconsolidated or unstable, to prevent borehole collapse
or to exclude water of undesirable quality. This type of well is constructed
by drilling.
Unstable-Consolidated Formation Partially Cased Well. This type
of well is built to obtain water from unstable, potentially caving forma-
tions. It is usually screened through the producing zone and may, under
some conditions, require the addition of coarse filter material. The well
may not be cased through all the formations above the producing zone,
except to exclude water of undesirable quality, but will have a surface
seal casing. This type of well is constructed by drilling.
Methods of Construction
Construction methods are many and varied, ranging from simple dig-
ging with hand tools to high speed drilling with sophisticated equipment.
The most commonly used methods are described below:
Digging Method. In this method the hole is constructed by digging to
the desired diameter and depth with hand or power tool. The dug out ma-
terials are removed by lifting them from the hole in some type of container.
The hole is shored, staved, or cased as the depth is increased. When casing
is used, a common practice is to add casing at the surface, allowing it to
sink of its own weight as the hole is excavated below the bottom of the
casing.
63
-------
Boring Method. In this method the hole is constructed by the use of
a selected diameter hand or power auger which is turned to bore the hole
to the desired depth. Cuttings are removed by pulling and emptying the
auger or bucket or by the screw action of the auger flite itself.
Driving Method. In this method the hole is constructed by forcing a
casing equipped with a drive point into the ground by a series of blows,
either manually or machine-delivered, on the top of the casing. Driven
wells (or "well points") should be installed only in soft formations that
are relatively free of cobbles or boulders. They are feasible only where
lifts are shallow and the quantity of water desired is small. Well points
can be installed by hand or machine.
Jetting and Hydraulicing Method. The jet drill is basically a combi-
nation percussion unit and pressure pump. The pressure pump is mounted
on the machine together with pipe and hose connections leading from the
pump to the drill pipe, with a return hose from the well casing to a pit or
other suitable container. A suction hose returns the water from the pit or
container to the pump. The drill pipe consists of a small diameter stand-
ard pipe with a bit or chisel attached to the bottom section. Water is
forced down through the drill pipe by means of the pressure pump and
out through holes in the bit. This water, being under pressure, carries the
cuttings to the surface through the space between the casing and the drill
pipe. The lifting and dropping action of the drill pipe chops up the mate-
rial in the hole and loosens it so that it may be washed to the surface.
This method uses a short, fast stroke and is very effective in soft ground,
sand and gravel, or other loose unconsolidated formations. This method is
best suited for smaller holes of from 2 to 4 inch diameter (5 to 10 cm.)
A percussion machine is also used for drilling holes by the hydraulicing
method. The difference between this and the jetting method is that with
the hydraulicing method no pressure pump is needed. The hydraulicing unit
utilizes a bit with an opening at the top and a valve seat and ball check
valve above it. Water is directed into the hole by gravity in the space be-
tween the drill pipe and the casing. The up and down motion of the drill
pipe acts as a displacement pump. The ball check valve opens on the down
stroke and draws material and fluid into the drill pipe. The valve closes on
the up stroke, holding the slurry within the pipe. Eventually the pipe fills
up and the mixture of fluid and cuttings are discharged at the surface.
Like jetting, the hydraulicing method is fast and efficient in relatively soft
formations such as clay and sand.
Cable Tool Method. The cable tool method is used to construct wells
by alternately lifting and dropping a set of drilling tools suspended on a
wire cable so that with each stroke the drill bit strikes the bottom of the
hole. The repeated action of the percussion drill permits bit penetration of
the underground formations. The loosened material and drill cuttings are
mixed with drilling water by action of the bit and the resulting slurry must
be removed from the drill hole by a bailer or sand pump. In drilling a dry
64
-------
hole, water must be added periodically to replace that removed with the
drill cuttings. Tools for drilling and bailing are carried on separate lines
or cables. Each cable is spooled on a separate drum.
In cable tool or percussion drilling there are basically three major oper-
ations : first, the drilling of the hole by chiseling or crushing the rock, clay,
or other material by the impact of the drill bit; second, removing the cut-
tings with a bailer as cuttings accumulate in the hole; and third, driving or
forcing the well casing down into the hole as the drilling proceeds. Well
casing used in most percussion-type drilling operations usually ranges from
four to 24 inches (10 to 61 cm) in diameter. This casing is used to keep
the well bore from collapsing and to prevent surface or subsurface leakage
of water or contaminants into the well bore.
Conventional Fluid Rotary Drilling Method. In the conventional
mud-rotary method of drilling, drilling is accomplished by rotating a drill
pipe and bit by means of a power drive. The drill bit cuts and breaks up
the rock material as it penetrates the formation. Drilling fluid is pumped
through the rotating drill pipe and holes in the bit. This fluid swirls in the
bottom of the hole, picking up material broken by the bit, then flows up-
ward in the well bore, carrying the cuttings to the surface.
The drill pipe and bit move progressively downward, deepening the hole
as the operation proceeds. At the land surface, the drilling fluid flows into
a settling pit where the cuttings settle to the bottom. From the settling
(mud) pit the fluid overflows into a second pit from which it is picked up
through the suction hose of the mud pump and recirculated through the
drill pipe. In the rotary drilling method the well casing is not introduced
into the hole until drilling operations are completed, the walls of the hole
being supported by the pressure (weight) of the drilling fluid.
Reverse Circulation Drilling Method. In reverse circulation drilling,
instead of circulating the drilling fluid through the drill pipe and up the
outside of the pipe, the process is reversed. Fluid is fed down through the
space between the wall of the hole and the drill pipe and it is then pumped
up, together with the cuttings, through the hollow part of the drill pipe and
out a discharge pipe. With the addition of air (applied via a compressor
through piping along the drill stem) drilling depths have been increased
in one instance, from 450 to 1,000 feet. Of particular importance is the
use of a light (nearly clear) drilling fluid which eliminates the need for
a viscous and heavy drilling mud used in conventional rotary drilling. The
mud sometimes tends to seal-off water-bearing formations. The use of a
relatively clear drilling fluid is possible because drilling is rapid; however,
a substantial quantity of fluid must be on hand to maintain an open hole.
This method is used for rapid drilling of large diameter holes in soft
formations where small boulders are encountered. Boulders up to six
inches (15 cm) in diameter can be brought up to the surface through the
hollow drill pipe. Such performance is possible because of the extremely
high velocity of the fluid as it is drawn up through the drill pipe by the
65
-------
suction pump. In the reverse circulation method, holes 16 inches to 72
inches (40.6 to 182.9 cm) in diameter have been drilled. The walls of the
hole are held in place by the pressure of the fluid against the sides of the
hole.
Air Rotary Drilling Method. In the air rotary method of drilling, air
serves as the fluid and excavation is accomplished exactly as is done in the
conventional rotary method. The bit cuts and breaks up the formation.
Air is forced down through the drilling pipe and out through holes at
the bottom of the rotary bit. A stream of water is often introduced into
the air system to help cool the drill bit and control dust. The air serves
both to cool the drill bit and force cuttings up and out of the hole. The
cuttings move up in the annular space between the drill pipe and the wall
of the hole, and are collected at the top. Air is used principally in hard
clay or rock formations, because once the air pressure is turned off, loose
formations tend to cave-in against the drill pipe. This method is not gen-
erally recommended for drilling in unconsolidated materials because the
quality of the samples are usually poor. Foaming additives are occasionally
used to increase the up-hole carrying capacity of the return air.
Down-ihe-Hole (Down-Hole Hammer, Hammer Drilling) Method.
The down-the-hole method involves a pneumatically operated bottom-hole
drill that efficiently combines the percussion action of cable tool drilling
with the turning action of rotary drilling. The pneumatic drill can be used
on a standard rotary rig with an air compressor of sufficient capacity, It
is used for fast and economical drilling of medium to extremely hard for-
mations. Fast penetration results from the blows transmitted directly to
the bit by the air piston. Continuous hole cleaning exposes new formation
to the bit and practically no energy is wasted in redrilling old cuttings.
Down-the-hole drilling is generally the fastest method of penetration in
hard rock. The bit is turned slowly (5 to 15 rpm) by the same method
by which the drill bit in the fluid or air drilling operation is rotated.
Foaming additives are occasionally used to increase the up-hole carrying
capacity of the return air.
METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION
46.100-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall choose the construction
method(s) to be used. These are:
Digging or Boring
Driving
Cable Tool (Percussion)
Jetting or Hydraulicing
Conventional Fluid Rotary Drilling
Reverse Circulation Rotary Drilling
Air Rotary Drilling
Down-the-hole Drilling
66
-------
DRILLING FLUID CONTROL PROGRAM
46.010-000-000. Production Zone Protection. Material used by
CONTRACTOR to prepare the drilling fluid shall be composed of fresh,
non-polluted water and sodium bentonite type drilling clay commercially
processed to meet or surpass the viscosity specification in the American
Petroleum Institute "Std. 13-A for Drilling Fluid Materials". All other
drilling fluid additives used will comply with recognized industry stand-
ards and practices, and they will be applied and used as prescribed by the
manufacturer. It is expressly understood that toxic and/or dangerous sub-
stances will not be added to the drilling fluid.
The drilling fluids program should be agreed to by the CONTRACTOR
and the OWNER or PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE. Selection and use of
the drilling fluid materials shall be a part of this agreement. The CON-
TRACTOR shall be responsible for maintaining the quality of the drilling
fluid to assure 1) protection of water bearing and potential water bearing
formations exposed in the bore hole, and 2) good representative samples of
the formation materials.
The drilling fluid properties required will depend on: 1) the type and
size of drilling equipment to be used, and 2) down hole conditions antici-
pated or encountered. Properties of the drilling fluid are to be measured in
accordance with the procedures of the American Petroleum Institute R.P.
13—B—"Procedures for Testing Drilling Fluids". Samples tested are those
caught at the rig pump suction with care taken to assure a true and repre-
sentative sample. Tests should be conducted: 1) every 50 feet of depth or
2) every four circulating hours or 3) whenever conditions appear to have
changed or problems arise.
1. Mud density: should be in the range of 9 pounds per gallon.
(higher if necessary to control a formation over-pressure situ-
ation.)
2. Mud viscosity: should be kept as thin as practical and still retain
formation stability and adequate hole cleaning. (Will depend on
ascending velocity in annulus and is usually in the range of 30 to
40 seconds per quart for properly sized drilling equipment and in
normal drilling situations).
3. Sand content: should not exceed 2 percent of volume.
The CONTRACTOR shall maintain current records on the site at all
times to show: 1) time, depth and results of all mud tests, 2) all materials
added to the system—kind, amount, time and depth, and 3) variances or
modifications from agreed to mud program—time, depth, reason and au-
thorization.
The CONTRACTOR is responsible for the removal of the drilling mud
from the hole and the development of the well, as per Article 52 and re-
lated specifications on well development.
67
-------
DRILLER'S LOGS AND REPORTS
46.001-000-000. Logs. The driller's log of the well, daily driller's
reports, and stratigraphic log and penetration log (if required), etc., shall
be prepared in accordance with Article 45.
TEMPORARY CAPPING
46.000—100—000. Temporary Capping. Any well that is to be tempo-
rarily removed from service, or which is completed for a period prior to
being placed in service, or is left uncompleted due to a recess or delay in
construction shall be capped with a water-tight welded or threaded cap or
equipped with some other type of "vandal-proof" cover satisfying applic-
able state or local regulations or recommendations.
METHOD OF PAYMENT OF WELL CONSTRUCTION
46.000-010-000. Method of Payment.
Option A (Lump Sum): All of the work performed under this Article
(46) shall be paid for as a lump sum.
Option B (Time and Materials): All of the work performed under this
Article (46) shall be paid for on the basis of the per hour price bid for
well construction equipment plus materials at cost plus percent of add-on
bid.
Option C (Unit Price): All of the following work performed under this
Article (46) shall be paid for at the unit price bid per hour for well con-
struction equipment plus the cost of any materials and/or subcontracted
services at the invoice price plus percent of add-on bid:
a. Well Construction Unit Price
b. Geophysical/Mechanical Logs Lump Sum
c. Formation Sampling (Per Sample) Unit Price
d. Services of Log Analyst Lump Sum
e. Temporary Capping Lump Sum
Article 47
Well Casing Selection and Installation
PREAMBLE
Casing is installed to prevent the collapse of the walls of the borehole,
to exclude, along with grouting, pollutants, either surface or subsurface,
from entering the water source, and to provide a channel for conveying the
water to the surface (or in the reverse direction for injection). Casing
also provides a housing for the pump mechanism.
Casing must be strong enough to resist the pressures exerted by the sur-
rounding materials, forces imposed on it during installation, and corro-
sion by soil and water environments. It must be of the proper length to
accomplish its purpose of providing a channel from the source to the sur-
face through unstable formations, and through zones of actual or potential
68
-------
contamination. Casing should extend from above known levels of flooding
to at least five feet below the lowest estimated pumping level of a well,
screened in sand and gravel. In consolidated formations casing should be
driven five feet into firm bed rock and cemented in place. Care must be
exercised when placing casing. In areas where subsidence or shifting forces
are known or expected to occur a self-sealing slip joint may be installed
in the casing to allow for vertical movement and prevent collapse.
Steel is the material most frequently used for well casing. Plastic well
casing is now being used successfully in many parts of the country. Con-
crete, fiberglass and asbestos cement casing have also been used.
Less common materials such as stainless steel, cupro-nickel alloys, silicon
bronze, aluminum, and other nonferrous metals, can be used for casing in
special situations where the natural soil and water-quality conditions dic-
tate their employment. Because of their higher cost and usually lower
strength, additional care should be exercised in their installation.
A number of technical and scientific organizations are active in promul-
gating pipe and casing specifications. Representative members of pro-
ducers, consumers, and general interest groups develop specification details
and tests which are then published by the associations involved. Prominent
and most active in connection with pipe and casing specifications are the
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), the American Petro-
leum Institute (API) and American Water Works Association (AWWA).
Such specifications serve three general functions. First, they stipulate
mill testing standards and prescribe methods of measuring required me-
chanical and physical properties. Secondly, they establish a common
ground of understanding between the casing buyer and the producer. They
provide a shortcut for easy, accurate ordering, eliminating most of the
requirements for detailed information which would otherwise be necessary
without a specification number symbol. Finally, they serve as a quality
warranty. When the mills affix the specifications number symbol to a length
of materials, they certify that it is made to meet all of the requirements of
the specifications.
Not all materials are covered by standard specifications and there are
few actual casing specifications. Most of those employed in the water well
industry are written for pipe wherein installation in a direction normal
to the earth's surface has not been considered in their preparation.
The most commonly used lining materials are tubular-steel products.
Steel is particularly suited to cable-tool drilling, because it is the only
practical material that can withstand driving or the pressure imposed by
jacking. Unfortunately, the terms "casing and pipe" are used interchange-
ably and designate a variety of tubular products; this is the source of much
confusion in the field of water well construction. There is, however, a dis-
tinguishing difference between pipe and casing. Pipe is manufactured in
cylindrical form at the producing mill, whereas casing is made cylindrical
by a fabricator from steel sheets or plates produced at a mill. Thus, casing
69
-------
is essentially fabricated pipe. The reason for the difference in manufacture
is because the demand for prefabricated pipe for use in the transmission
of water, oil, and gas far exceeds the demand for casing.
There are three principal types of tubular-steel products in satisfactory
use for water well casing. The first is line pipe and standard pipe made to
conform to standards of the American Petroleum Institute (API) or
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). Casing fabricated from
structural steel plate to conform to ASTM specifications is the second type.
A third type, referred to by manufacturers and fabricators as "well cas-
ing steel", is made from high strength carbon steel sheets. At present there
are no standard specifications dealing with this material other than those
of the individual manufacturer.
Although it is possible to have steel pipe or casing made to any desired
diameter or thickness, manufacturers and fabricators produce the products
in common demand. Pipe diameters range from 4 to 36 inches with thick-
nesses up to one-half inch. Casing is made from steel plate three-sixteenths
to five-sixteenths of an inch thick with diameters between 8 and 30 inches.
Sheet steel thicknesses run from 12 gage to 6 gage and is used in fabricat-
ing both single and double-well casing in diameters of 6 to 24 inches.
Pipe made of concrete, both plain and reinforced, PVC, asbestos cement,
stainless steel and other materials are covered by specifications of ASTM
or AWWA. There are no casing specifications for these materials at
present.
There are two principal methods for installing casing. They are driving
(of which jacking is a variation) and lowering (of which "floating", a
method employed where the casing load is great, such as in large-diameter
deep wells, also is a variation).
All joints should be made in a manner suitable to the material to insure
that they will be watertight where necessary. If joints are welded the stand-
ards of the American Welding Society should apply.
Regardless of size, weight or length of the well casing, it is important
that it be properly seated to insure a satisfactory well. When casing is to be
seated, (as contrasted to that which is suspended or "hung") it should be
firmly positioned so that it will not move vertically (settle) or go out of
alignment.
Selecting Casing Diameter
The diameter of well casing is best chosen as two nominal sizes larger than
the bowl size of the pump that will be installed. Under no circumstances
should it be less than one nominal size larger. Table 2 lists casing sizes
recommended for wells of selected yield. These sizes were determind by
taking the bowl sizes of the most efficient 1800 RPM vertical turbine pumps
that could be used to pump a given quantity of water and specifying two
nominal sizes larger for the casing. In making this determination of opti-
mum casing sizes, velocity and head losses caused by the vertical move-
70
-------
ment of water from the entrance portion of the well through the casing to
the pump intake were taken into account.. The diameters specified are such
that these head losses will be small. If the casing size is selected according
to the listing, there should be adequate clearance for the vertical turbine
pump. The pump shaft will be plumb and binding will not occur even if
the casing is slightly out of line and not exactly plumb.
TABLE 2.—For Line Shaft Turbines 1800 rpm
Yield
Less than 100 gpm
75-175 gpm
150-400 gpm
350-600 gpm
600-1300 gpm
1300-1800 gpm
1800-3000 gpm
3000-4500 gpm
Over 4500 gpm
Recommended
casing size
6" I.D.
... 8" I.D.
10" I.D.
.. . 12" I.D.
16" O.D.
20" O.D.
24" O.D.
30" O.D.
30" O.D.
In large capacity wells, it is often advantageous from the standpoint of
power efficiency and extended pump life to utilize larger diameter 1200
RPM bowls. The initial cost of a larger diameter well to accommodate this
type of bowl is soon compensated for by the increased efficiency and
longer life. Table 3 shows the casing sizes recommended for such yields.
TABLE 3.—For Line Shaft Turbines 1200 rpm
Minimum recommended
Yield casing size
1200-1800 gpm . .... 20" O.D.
1800-3000 gpm ... . . 24" O.D.
3000-4500 gpm . . 28" O.D.
Over 4500 gpm . . .30" O.D.
For smaller capacity domestic wells similar problems of relating casing
size to pump size occur. Table 4 gives recommended casing sizes.
Selecting Casing Thickness
The thickness of material used for well casing should be selected in ac-
cordance with good design practice and experience as applied to condi-
tions found at the well site. The ability of a specified casing to resist ex-
ternal forces can be calculated theoretically. However, the effect of forces
imposed on it during installation are not known with certainty and prac-
tical research into the ability of casing materials to withstand installation
as well as subsurface stresses has not been done to any extent. Hydrostatic
test pressures on pipe listed in manufacturers specification literature are
internal pressures measured at the mill and do not necessarily relate
directly to working pressures. Accordingly, designers must introduce safety
factors to insure that the casing will resist the forces expected to occur.
71
-------
TABLE 4.—Casing Sizes—Domestic Wells
Yield at
50'
drawdown
Less than 8 gpm .
8 to 16.5 gpm
Greater than 16.5 gpm
Recommended
casing diameter
2"
3"
4"
5"
6"
2"
3"
4"
5"
6"
3"
4"
5"
6"
Jet
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Pump type
Double
jet
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Submersible
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
The collapse strength of fabricated sheet steel pipe for various diam-
eters and thickness has been calculated assuming the water level inside
the casing is rapidly lowered and the water level outside remains static.
Values are listed in Table 5.
Table 5 shows pressures at which it is estimated single casing will col-
lapse if water is lowered on the inside of the casing, and the water on the
outside remains static. When pumping cement behind a casing it must be
kept in mind that cement weighs more than water, therefore the weight per
cubic inch of cement must be calculated and the values in pounds used from
the chart, rather than the "head in feet".
Standard steel line pipe thicknesses for various diameters are shown in
Table 6, which is based on both the need for strength in various kinds of
construction, and the desirability of long-life resistance to corrosion.
Suggested minimum thicknesses for standard steel plate and sheets are
listed in Table 7. Similar recommendations for steel sheets (called "well
casing steel") manufactured in accordance with specifications of steel pro-
ducers are listed in Table 8. Suggested thicknesses for steel casing for vari-
ous depth and diameters will be found in literature published by steel
manufacturers and fabricators.
PVC Casing*
PVC (polyvinyl chloride) plastic pipe used for well casing shall con-
form to ASTM-2241-73 for well diameetrs up to 4 inches (See Table 9).
* New ASTM Standards are currently under review. When they become available
they will replace those standards shown in Tables 9 and 10.
72
-------
TABLE 5.—Collapse Strength of Steel Pipe in Pounds Per Square Inch
and Feet of Water Head
I.D.
of
Pipe
8"
Ibs
ft
10"
Ibs
ft
12"
Ibs
ft . .
14"
Ibs
ft .
16"
Ibs
ft
18"
Ibs
ft
20"
Ibs
ft
22"
Ibs
ft
24"
Ibs
ft
26"
Ibs
ft
28"
Ibs .
ft
30"
Ibs
ft
32"
Ibs
ft
34"
Ibs . .
ft
36"
Ibs
ft
No. 12 No. 10
(Gauge) (Gauge)
127 275
. . 293 634
65 141
150 325
38 81
. . 88 187
24 51
55 118
16 34
37 78
24
55
17
39
3/16"
(0.186")
646
1,488
331
763
191
440
121
279
81
187
57
131
41
94
31
71
24
55
19
44
15
35
1/4"
(0.250")
1,532
3,530
784
1,806
454
1,046
286
659
191
440
134
309
98
226
74
170
57
131
45
104
36
83
29
67
24
55
20
46
17
39
5/16"
(0.313")
2,992
6,894
1,532
3,530
887
2,044
558
1,286
374
862
263
606
192
442
144
332
111
256
87
200
70
161
57
131
47
108
39
90
33
76
3/8"
i (0.375")
5,170
11,912
-s.
2,647
6,099
1,532
3,530
965
2,223
646
1,488
454
1,046
331
763
249
574
191
440
151
348
121
279
98
226
81
187
67
155
57
131
73
-------
TABLE 6.—Wall Thicknesses for Steel* Water Well Pipe
Nominal
size in
inches
2 ...
2V2
3
3%
4 .
5
6 .
8
10 .
12 . .
14
16
18
20 ..
Diameters
in inches
External
. . 2.375
2.875
3.500
4.000
4.500
5.563
6.625
8.625
10.750
12.750
14.000
16.000
18.000
20.000
Internal
2.067
2.469
3.068
3.548
4.026
5.047
6.065
8.071
10.192
12.090
13.250
15.250
17.250
19.250
Wall
thicknesses
in inches
0.154
0.203
0.216
0.226
0.237
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.279
0.330
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
Weights in pounds
per foot
Plain threads and
Ends
3.56
5.79
7.58
9.11
10.79
14.62
18.97
24.70
31.20
43.77
54.57
62.58
70.59
78.60
Collars
3.71
5.88
7.67
9.27
11.01
14.90
19.33
25.44
32.20
45.40
55.80
64.08
72.37
80.70
* Standard specifications of API, ASTM.
TABLE 7.t—Steel Well Casing Fabricated From Standard* Plate or Sheets
(single casing)
Diameter (inches)
6
8
10
12 .
14
16
18
20
22
24
30.
Thickness (inches) $
0.1046 (12 gage)
0.1046 (12 gage)
0.1046 (12 gage)
0.1345 (10 gage)
0.1345 (10 gage)
0.1644 ( 8 gage)
0.1644 ( 8 gage)
0.1644 ( 8 gage)
0.2500
0.2500
0.2500
* Standard Specifications of ASTM.
•f Use of this material is not recommended although it is used in some parts of the United States.
J EPA recommends that the minimum wall thickness for steel casing, to provide adequate life
under moderately corrosive conditions, should be 1/4 inch (0.250 in.). For very corrosive conditions,
the thickness should be correspondingly greater.
CASING SELECTION
47.100-000-000. Well Casing Selection. All well casing shall be
new. They shall be made of . ^material)
which conforms to (enter here the material
specification including organization name or abbreviation, numerical desig-
nation and title or in some instances, trade name.) The casings shall be
of the diameters and lengths specified in the following listing.
Diameter
(inches) (cm)
(I.D./O.D.)
Weight (pounds/ft )
(kg/meter)
Length
(feet) (meter)
74
-------
TABLE 8.t — Steel Well Casing Fabricated From "Well Casing Steel" Sheets*
(single casing except where noted)
Diameter (inches)
Thickness (inches) J
6
8
10
12
14 .
16 .
18 .
20 .
22 ..
24 .
30 .
0.1094 (12 gage)
0.1094 (12 gage)
0.1094 (12 gage)
0.1406 (10 gage)
0.1406 (10 gage)
0.1719 ( 8 gage)
0.1719 ( 8 gage)
0.1719 ( 8 gage)
Double thick (10 gage)
Double thick (10 gage)
Double thick ( 8 gage)
* Manufacturers specifications.
t Use of this material is not recommended although it is used in some parts of the United States.
J (Same note as in Table 7).
TABLE 9.—PVC Casing
ASTMD 2241-73*
SDR 21 (Type 1120-1220)
Nominal
size
Outside
diameter
Inside
diameter
Minimum wall
thickness
Inches
1.5
2
2.5
3
4
1.900
2.375
2.875
3.500
4.500
1.720
2.149
2.601
3.166
4.072
0.090
0.113
0.137
0.177
0.214
PVC casing for well diameters of 5 inches through 12 inches shall con-
form to ASTM-D1785-73 (See Table 10).
TABLE 10.—PVC Casing
ASTMD 1785-73*
Schedule 40 (Type 1120-1220)
Nominal
size
Outside
diameter
Inside
diameter
Minimum wall
thickness
Inches
5
6
8
10
12
5.563
6.625
8.625
10.750
12.750
5.047
6.065
7.981
10.020
11.938
0.258
0.280
0.322
0.365
0.406
* New ASTM Standards are currently under review. When they become available they will
replace those standards shown,
All casing shall bear mill markings that will identify the material as that
which is specified. If necessary, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish the engi-
75
-------
neer with a copy of the mill certificate for approval before delivery of the
casing to the well site.
METHODS OF INSTALLATION
47.010-000-000. Driven (Well Point). A hole shall be bored with
a hand or power-operated auger slightly larger in diameter than the well
point. The hole shall be vertical and extend as far as possible into the
water-bearing formation. The drive point and the appropriate number of
sections of riser pipe (in lengths of 5 feet (1.5 m) or more) shall be as-
sembled and inserted in the bored hole. If used, couplings shall have re-
cessed ends and tapered threads so that when assembled no pipe threads
are exposed. Pipe thread compound shall be applied to the threads to make
the joints water tight. A malleable iron drive cap shall be fastened to the
top of the assembly. Driving shall be done with a driving tool or maul sus-
pended on a tripod or derrick. The riser pipe shall be guided to insure
that the well will be vertical and if threaded turned with a wrench from
time to time in a clockwise direction to insure that the threaded sections
remain tight. It shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to utilize the
equipment he deems suitable to insure a satisfactory well which will main-
tain alignment, plumbness and roundness during installation.
47.020—000—000. Jacking. Jacking is used to install casing when
drilling wells with cable tools, especially when mud scows are used. A
pulldown spread footing shall be installed around the well and the jacking
force on the casing achieved by pulling down on the casing with the ram
end of hydraulic jacks while the cylinder end is secured to the spread
footing.
47.030-000-000. Driven (Drive Shoe). Casing may be driven
either by percussion from the cable tool string, or by a pneumatic tool
designed to drive casing through unconsolidated formations. When per-
manent well casing is driven, a standard drive shoe shall be welded or
threaded on the lower end of the string of casing. The shoe shall have a
beveled and tempered cutting edge of metal forged, cast or fabricated for
this purpose. It shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to utilize the
equipment he deems suitable to insure that the well will maintain alignment,
plumbness, and roundness during installation.
47.040-000-000. Lowering. The lowering method is used to install a
jointed casing string in a predrilled hole. The casing shall be lowered with
the drilling machine, utilizing clamps, elevators or other mechanical de-
vices.
47.050—000—000. Floating. Where the casing load is extremely large
it may be desirable to "float" the casing into place. A float collar shall be
installed on the casing at the appropriate place in the casing string or a
float plug shall be installed in the casing string near the bottom. Where a
float collar or float shoe is to be used a casing-size dummy (40 ft. (12.20
76
-------
m) minimum length) shall be run into the hole first to insure that the hole
is straight and free from obstruction which could result in a stuck casing.
METHOD OF JOINING
47.001—000—000. Contractor's Choice. Casing lengths shall be joined
watertight by a method appropriate to the material used, as selected by
the CONTRACTOR and approved by the OWNER, so that the resulting joint
shall have the same structural integrity as the casing itself. If metallic casing
is welded, the standards of the American Welding Society shall apply.
If threaded and coupled joints are used, couplings shall be API or equiva-
lent, made up so that when tight all threads will be buried in the lip of the
coupling.
Plastic casing sections shall be joined watertight by either solvent weld-
ing or fusion welding in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer
of the materials used, or by the use of threaded and coupled joints.
When concrete pipe is used, the casing shall be joined in accordance with
standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials or the Ameri-
can Water Works Association. Special care shall be taken to avoid chipping
or cracking the casing.
When asbestos cement pipe is used, the casings shall be joined in accord-
ance with standards of the American Water Works Association. Special care
shall be taken to avoid chipping or cracking the casing.
Other Materials: Casing made of other materials (aluminum, copper,
brass, fiberglass, etc.) shall be joined in accordance with the manufac-
turer's instructions.
SANITARY PROTECTION OF WELL
47.000-100-000. Termination at Top of Well. At all times during
the progress of the work the CONTRACTOR shall use reasonable precau-
tions to prevent either tampering with the well or the entrance of foreign
material into it.
Upon completion of the well, the CONTRACTOR shall install a suitable
threaded, flanged, or welded cap or compression seal so as to prevent any
pollutants from entering the well. The watertight casing, curbing, pitless
adapter or pitless unit (if approved for use by federal, state or local regula-
tions) of any well shall extend not less than 12 inches (30 cm) above the
pumphouse floor or final ground level elevation, and not less than 12 inches
(30 cm) * above the normally anticipated flood level of record. Any equip-
ment which will permit direct open access to the well shall also meet the
above height requirements and shall be sealed or screened so as to prevent
entrance of foreign matter or contaminants. The ground immediately sur-
rounding the top of the well casing or pitless unit shall be sloped away from
the well. There shall be no openings in the casing wall below its top except
* EPA recommends at least 24 inches (60 cm) above the highest known flood level.
77
-------
for approved pitless well adapters or units, measurement access ports and
grout nipples installed in conformance with these standards.
The pitless adapter or unit, including the cap or cover, the pitless case and
other attachments shall be designed and constructed to prevent the entrance
of contaminants into the well from surface or near-surface sources. Pitless
units shall be attached to the casing by threading or welding in a manner
which will make the joint sound and watertight.
CASING SEATING
47.000-010-000. Unconsolidated Formations. In unconsolidated
formations the casing is supported by the collapse and compaction during
well development. The completion of the sanitary surface seal will assist in
supporting the casing.
47.000-020-000. Consolidated Formations. In consolidated for-
mations the casing should extend at least five feet into the formation to
assure a proper seat and bottom seal. It shall be the responsibility of the
CONTRACTOR to effect a proper seal. Where the casing is to be driven it
shall be fitted with a drive shoe and shall be driven to refusal. Where the
casing is to be placed (rather than driven), cement grout shall be placed in
the bottom of the hole in accordance with Article 48.
PRESSURE TESTING OF SEATING
47.000-001-000. Pressure Testing of Seating. Where casing has
been driven, pressure testing shall be employed immediately following
installation to determine whether an air-tight seating has been accomplished.
An appropriate temporary airtight cap is to be installed and a pressure of
7 to 10 pounds per square inch is to be maintained within the well, without
the addition of more air, for a period of not less than one hour. Any loss of
air shall be construed as indicating a defective seal. To correct such a defect,
the OWNER shall require the CONTRACTOR to make the necessary re-
pairs by either cementing the seating zone or by other means acceptable to
both the OWNER and CONTRACTOR.
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR CASING
AND INSTALLATION
47.000-000-100. Method of Payment.
Option A (Lump Sum): All of the work performed under this Article (47)
shall be paid for as a lump sum.
Option B (Time and Materials): All of the work performed under this
Article (47) shall be paid for at the unit price bid per hour for well con-
tion equipment per hour plus materials at cost plus per cent of add-on bid.
Option C (Unit Price): All of the following work performed under this
Article (47.) shall be paid for at the unit price bid per hour for well con-
struction equipment plus the cost of any materials and/or subcontracted
services at the invoice price plus percent of add-on bid:
78
-------
a. Casing Furnished and Installed Unit Price
b. Pitless Unit Furnished and Installed Lump Sum
c. Pressure Testing Lump Sum
Article 48
Well Grouting
PREAMBLE
Grouting consists of filling an annular or other space with an impervious
material. The reasons for grouting are: 1) protection of the aquifer, or
aquifers, including the prevention of water movement between aquifers, for
purposes of maintaining quality or preserving the hydraulic response of the
producing zone(s), and 2) protecting the well against the entry of unwanted
water from the surface or a subsurface zone.
A third, and sometimes important purpose of grouting is to protect the
casing. This may be necessary to guard against attack by corrosive waters,
or where special assurance of structural integrity is desired. A satisfactory
grouting program must result in complete envelopment of the casing.
In determining the specific grouting requirements of a well at a designated
site, consideration must be given to existing surface conditions, especially
the location of sources of pollution, and to subsurface geologic and hydro-
logic conditions. To protect against contamination or pollution by surface
waters or shallow subsurface waters (such as effluent from septic tanks) the
annular space shall be sealed to whatever depth is necessary to protect the
well. This may be as little as 10 feet or more than 100 feet, depending
on conditions.
Formations which yield polluted water or water of an undesirable quality
must be adequately sealed off to prevent pollution or contamination of the
overlying or underlying waterbearing zones. To accomplish this the annular
space shall be grouted from at least 10 feet above to 10 feet below the
interval from which such polluted or mineralized water is being produced.
In general, positive emplacement of grout by tremie, pumping, or pressure
is strongly recommended for all wells where the grout is to be placed under
water or where the void space to be filled is not easily accessible from the
surface.
Centralizers may be required in certain zones to prevent the casing from
contacting the wall of the bore hole, or to maintain a minimum annular
space where a complete seal is imperative.
Where grounting is required the OWNER and/or appropriate regula-
tory agency should be notified in advance of the work. Prior to grouting the
annular space should be flushed to assure that the space is open and ready
to receive the sealing material. Grouting should be done in one continuous
operation in which the annular space is filled. Where pours exceed 100 feet,
the collapse strength of the casing should be checked prior to grouting.
Grout containing cement should be entirely placed before the occurrence of
79
-------
the initial set. Again, caution is required in deep seals. It is essential that
the grout always be introduced at the bottom of the space being grouted.
This is to avoid segregation or bridging of the grout materials and to
exclude foreign substances. The grout may be forced into the annular space
by suitable pumps or by air or water pressure.
Under certain conditions placement by gravity or by means of dump
bailers is practical and satisfactory. Gravity installation without the aid of
a tremie or grout pipe should not be used unless the interval to be grouted
can be seen clearly and is dry. In no instance should it be done beyond 30
feet of depth. Only by visual observation can there be assurance that grout
introduced in this way is properly and uniformly distributed.
Where a tremie pipe is used there should be a minimum annular opening
of two inches (5.08 cm) between the outer surface of the inside casing and
the inside surface of the external casing or borehole. The minimum size
tremie pipe should be one and one-half inches in diameter. Where concrete
grout is used the minimum size tremie pipe should be a nominal one and
one-half inches in diameter.
The method used shall be optional with the CONTRACTOR, provided
there is no conflict with requirements for construction practice set forth in
these standards. Cement-based materials are the most commonly used
grouts. Neat cement (cement and water), sand-cement, and concrete (ce-
ment, sand and coarse aggregate) are readily available already mixed or
they can be easily mixed at the site. Neat cement and sand cement grouts
are effective and permanent sealing materials and are preferred. Concretes
are more' applicable where the space to be filled is substantial and war-
rants the saving gained from the use of less cement.
The usefulness of clay as a sealant in well construction is limited to
instances where drying out and washing away cannot occur. Clays are
usually not suitable as sealants under the following conditions:
1. When sealants will be in contact with aquifers.
2. Wherever structural strength or stability of the sealant is required.
3. Wherever the sealant might dry out.
4. Wherever flowing or moving water might break down the sealant.
For the use of clay in well abandonment operations see Article 56.
There are presently no fool-proof field tests that can be performed to de-
termine if a proper grout seal has been achieved. All five of the most com-
monly used field tests, e.g., the static water level test, the water temperature
test, the water chemical composition test, the pressure test and the cement
bond log test, etc., have imperfections. However, under controlled condi-
tions, the latter two tests may indicate in a general way the nature of the
grout seal and its probable effectiveness. Considerable research is needed
in this area of technology. Suffice it here to state that the proper choice of
any field method depends solely on a clear understanding of the specific
hydrogeologic conditions and the construction techniques and materials em-
ployed in the grouting operation.
80
-------
It should be noted that in situations where the effectiveness of the grouting
procedure is of extreme importance, it is recommended that the grouted zone
either be pressure tested or an appropriate cement bond log run. The
interpretation of the data from such tests must be made by a log analyst with
considerable experience with such data.
GROUTING MATERIALS TO BE USED
48.100-000-000. Concrete Grout. A mixture of Portland cement
(ASTM C150), sand, coarse aggregate and water in the proportion of at least
five (5) bags of cement per cubic yard of concrete to not more than seven
(7) * gallons of clean water per bag of cement (one cubic foot or 94 pounds)
shall be used. The use of special cements, bentonite to reduce shrinkage or
other admixtures (ASTM C494) to reduce permeability, increase fluidity,
and/or control time of set, and the composition of the resultant slurry must
be approved by the OWNER or PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE.
48.200-000-000. Sand Cement Grout. A mixture of Portland Cement
(ASTM C150), sand and water in the proportion of not more than two
parts by weight of sand to one part of cement with not more than seven (7) *
gallons of clean water per bag of cement (one cubic foot or 94 pounds)
shall be used. The use of special cements, bentonite to reduce shrinkage or
other admixtures (ASTM C494) to reduce permeability, increase fluidity,
and/or control time of set, and the composition of the resultant slurry must
be approved by the OWNER or PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE.
48.300-000-000. Neat Cement Grout. A mixture of Portland cement
(ASTM C150) and not more than seven (7) * gallons of clean water per
bag (one cubic foot or 94 pounds) of cement, shall be used. The use of
special cements, bentonite to reduce shrinkage or other admixtures (ASTM
C494) to reduce permeability, increase fluidity, and/or control time of set,
and the composition of the resultant slurry must be approved by the
OWNER or PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE.
METHODS OF INSTALLATION OF GROUT
48.010-000-000. Bailer Dumping. Grout material shall be placed
by lowering the grout material to the bottom of the hole in a bailer, and
dumping (after water or other drilling fluid has been circulated in the
annular space sufficient to clear obstructions). The bailer shall not be
dumped more than one foot from the bottom of the hole, and a time of no
more than ten minutes shall elapse between dumps in a single plug. Curing
time before construction may be resumed: Portland Cement Type I-mini-
mum 72 hours; Type Ill-minimum 36 hours.
* EPA recommends not more than 6 gallons of clean water per bag of cement. It
should be noted that better flow characteristics can be produced through the use of
cement additives, thereby eliminating the weaking effects which may result from the
use of excess water.
81
-------
48.020-000-000. Gravity Filling Without Tremie Method. Grout
material shall be uniformly poured into the annular space without the aid
of a tremie or grout pipe (after water or other drilling fluid has been
circulated in the annular space sufficient to clear obstructions). This method
shall be employed only where the interval to be grouted is clearly visible
from the surface and is dry. Maximum allowable depth to bottom of grout
interval shall be 30 feet.
48.030-000-000. Tremie Method. Grout material shall be placed by
tremie pouring (after water or other drilling fluid has been circulated in
the annular space sufficient to clear obstructions). The tremie method shall
only be used where there is a minimum annular space of 3 inches (7.62 cm)
between the outside surface of the inside casing and the inside surface of
either the external casing or the borehole. The minimum size tremie pipe
utilized shall be 2 inches (5.08 cm) inside diameter. Where concrete grout
is used the minimum size tremie pipe used shall be three inches (7.62 cm)
inside diameter. When making a tremie pour, the tremie pipe shall be lowered
to the bottom of the zone being grouted, and raised slowly as the grout
material is introduced. The tremie pipe shall be kept full continuously from
start to finish of the grouting procedure, with the discharge end of the
tremie pipe being continuously submerged in the grout until the zone to be
grouted is completely filled. Curing time before construction may be
resumed: Portland Cement Type I-minimum 72 hours; Type Ill-minimum
36 hours.
48.040-000-000. Positive Placement—Exterior Method. Grout
material shall be placed by a positive displacement method such as pumping
or forced injection by air pressure (after water or other drilling fluid has
been circulated in the annular space sufficient to clear obstructions). Grout
shall be injected in the annular space between the inner casing and either
the outer casing or the borehole. The annular space must be a minimum of
IVz inches (3.81 cm) for sand-and-cement or neat cement grout, and not
less than three times the size of the largest coarse aggregate used. The grout
pipe shall extend from the surface to the bottom of the zone to be grouted.
The grout pipe shall have a minimum inside diameter of one inch for sand-
cement or neat cement grout. It shall have a minimum diameter of 11/2 inches
(3.8 cm) for concrete grout. Grout shall be placed, from bottom to top,
in one continuous operation. The grout pipe may be slowly raised as the
grout is placed but the discharge end of the grout pipe must be submerged in
the emplaced grout at all times until grouting is completed. The grout pipe
shall be maintained full, to the surface, at all times until the completion of
the grouting of the entire specified zone. In the event of interruption in the
grouting operations, the bottom of the pipe should be raised above the grout
level and should not be resubmerged until all air and water have been
displaced from the grout pipe and the pipe flushed clean with clear water.
Curing time before construction may be resumed: Portland Cement Type I-
minimum 72 hours; Type II-minimum 36 hours.
82
-------
48.050-000-000. Positive Placement—Interior Method—Two
Plug. Grout shall be placed by the two-plug cementing method (after water
or other drilling fluid has been circulated in the annular space sufficient to
clear obstructions). The first spacer plug, which shall be a drillable plug
such as a plaster-type material, shall then be inserted and the casing capped.
A measured volume of grout shall be pumped in which shall be of sufficient
quantity to grout the casing in place. The casing shall then be uncapped, the
second plug shall be inserted, and the casing recapped. A measured volume
of water slightly less than the volume of the casing shall then be pumped
into the casing until the second plug is pushed to the bottom of the casing,
expelling the grout from the casing up and into the annular space. The
water in the casing shall be maintained constant to prevent backflow until
the grout has set. Pressure shall be maintained for a minimum of 24 hours
or until such time as a sample of the grout indicates a satisfactory set.
Cement grout shall be used for this procedure with a minimum annular space
thickness of \Vi inches (3.81 cm) completely surrounding the casing. Curing
time before construction may be resumed: Portland Cement Type I-mini-
mum 72 hours; Type Ill-minimum 36 hours. Concrete grout cannot be
used with this method.
48.060-000-000. Positive Placement—Interior Method—Upper
Plug. Grout shall be placed by the upper plug casing method (after water
or other drilling fluid has been circulated in the annular space sufficient to
clear obstructions). A measured quantity of grout, sufficient to grout the
casing in place, shall be pumped into the capped casing. Because this grout
is in direct contact with the drilling fluid there will be a narrow zone of
weak grout between the drilling fluid and the good grout. The casing shall
be uncapped, and a drillable plug, constructed of plastic or other suitable
material shall be inserted on top of the grout and the casing recapped. A
measured volume of water, equal to the volume of the casing, shall be
pumped into the casing, forcing the plug to the bottom of the casing and
expelling the grout into the annular space surrounding the casing. Utilizing
this method the weak grout zone at the interface of grout and drilling
fluid will not be located at the critical position at the bottom of the casing.
The water in the casing shall be maintained under pressure to prevent back
flow until the grout has set. Pressure shall be maintained for a minimum of
24 hours or until such time as a sample of the grout indicates a satisfactory
set. Neat cement or sand-cement grout shall be used for this procedure, with
a minimum annular space opening of \l/2 inches (3.8 cm) completely sur-
rounding the casing. Curing time before construction may be resumed:
Portland Cement Type I-minimum 72 hours; Type Ill-minimum 36 hours.
Concrete grout cannot be used with this method.
48.070-000-000. Positive Placement—Interior Method—Capped
Casing. Grout shall be placed by pumping or air pressure injection through
the grout pipe installed inside the casing from the casing head to a point 5
feet (1.5 m) above the bottom of the casing (after water or other drilling
83
-------
fluid has been circulated in the annular space sufficient to clear obstructions).
The grout pipe shall extend airtight, through a sealed cap on the casing head
of the well casing. The casing head shall be equipped with a relief valve and
the drop pipe shall be equipped at the top with a valve permitting injection.
The lower end of the drop pipe and the casing shall be open. Clean water
shall be injected down the grout pipe until it returns through the casing
head relief valve. The relief valve is then closed and injection of water is
continued until it flows from the bore hole outside of the casing to be
grouted in place. This circulation of water is intended to clean the hole and
condition it to better take the grout. Without significant interruption, grout
shall be substituted for water and, in a continuous manner, injected down
the grout pipe until it returns to the surface outside of the casing. A small
amount of water, not to exceed seventeen gallons per hundred lineal feet
(30 m) of 2 inch (5.08 cm) droppipe may be used to flush the grout pipe,
but pressure shall be maintained constant on the inside of the grout pipe
and the inside of the casing until the grout has set. Pressure shall be main-
tained for at least 24 hours, or until such time as a sample of the grout
indicates a satisfactory set. Neat cement or sand-cement grout shall be used
for this procedure with a minimum annular space of \Vi inches (3.8 cm)
completely surrounding the casing. Curing time before construction may be
resumed: Portland Cement Type I-minimum 72 hours; Type Ill-minimum
36 hours. Congrete grout cannot be used with this method.
48.080-000-000. Continuous Injection Method. Grout shall be
placed by the float shoe continuous injection method, (after water or other
drilling fluid has been circulated in the annular space sufficient to clear
obstructions). The bottom of the casing shall be fitted with a suitable drill-
able float shoe equipped with a back pressure valve. Tubing or pipe shall be
run to the float shoe to which it shall be connected by a bayonet fitting, left
hand thread coupling, or similar release mechanism. Water or other drilling
fluid shall be circulated through the tubing and up through the annular
space outside the casing. When the annular space is clean and open, grout
shall be pumped down the pipe or tubing and forced by continual pumping
out into the annular space surrounding the casing. Pumping shall continue
until the entire zone to be grouted is filled. The grout pipe shall then be
detached from the float shoe and raised to the surface for flushing. After
the grout has set the float shoe, back pressure valve, and any concrete plug
remaining in the bottom of the casing shall be drilled out. A neat cement or
sand-cement grout shall be used for this procedure with a minimum annular
space of 1.5 inches completely surrounding the casing. Curing time required
before construction may be resumed shall be 72 hours for Type I Portland
Cement and 36 hours for Type III. Concrete grout cannot be used with
this method.
48.090-000-000. Grout Displacement Method. The hole shall be
filled with the estimated volume of grout required for the purpose intended.
The casing fitted at the bottom with a drillable back pressure valve, metal
84
-------
plate, or similar seal shall be lowered through the grout to the bottom of
the hole. If necessary to maintain the bottom of the casing at the bottom of
the hole, the casing shall be filled with water, or drilling fluid, and in some
cases by applying a load on the bottom with drill pipe. The load shall be
maintained until the grout has set, after which the bottom plug is drilled
out and the well deepened. Use of this method is limited to wells not more
than 100 feet in depth.
LOCATION OF GROUT
48.001—000-000. Surface Formation Seal. The annular space to
be gro'uted, and surrouriding the permanent well casing at the upper
terminus of the well, shall be not less than a nominal 2 inches. The length
of the grout seal shall be whatever is necessary to prevent the entrance of
surface water or undesirable subsurface water into the well. In any cir-
cumstance, the length of seal shall not be less than the minimum specified
in the state or locally applicable construction code.
The entire space to be grouted must be open and available to receive the
grout at the time the grouting operation is performed. If a section of
larger pipe (conductor pipe) is installed to keep the entire space open (in
caving materials), this larger pipe must be removed, as the grout is in-
stalled, from the zone where the seal is required.
The effective length of grout seal (for sanitary purposes) shall be that
distance measured from the deepest limit of the seal up to the depth of
frost penetration. If a pitless adapter or unit is to be installed, the upper
limit of the seal shall be one foot below the field connection of the adapter
or unit.
48.002-000-000. Bottom Seal Grouting. Grout shall be placed in
the annular space surrounding the bottom of the casing by the method
specified. The space shall be grouted to the extent indicated in Figure 1.
48.003—000—000. Selected Interval Grouting. All zones containing
water of unsuitable quality shall be grouted from a point at least 5 feet
(1.5 m) below, to a point at least 5 feet (1.5 m) above the unsuitable
zone. The annular space surrounding the casing between grouted zones
shall be filled with sand or other suitable granular material.
48.004-000-000. Continuous Grouting. Grout shall be placed in
the annular space surrounding the casing by the method specified. Grout-
ing shall be continuous from the bottom of the permanent casing to the
land surface; or, where a filter pack has been installed, from the top of
the pack (following development) to the land surface; or, where a well
screen only has been installed, from a point 5 feet (1.5 m) above the screen
to the land surface. When a pitless adapter or unit is to be installed, the
grout shall extend from such depth to within one foot of the field connec-
tion of the adapter or unit.
CENTRALIZERS
48.000-100-000. Contractor's Choice.
85
-------
MINIMUM LENGTHS OF CEMENT
FOR DIFFERENT SIZES AND LENGTHS OF CASING
FORMULAE: J.
Required cementing (ft.)= 7x Norn. Diam. +7 Total Length.
Minimum for any size regardless of length =30xNom. Diam.
Note: for oasuig lengths over 400 feet,
cement 1/7 of total casing length.
400
100
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
Minimum Length of Cement (feet)
-------
48.000-200-000. Centralisers at Bottom of Hole. Centralizers
shall be required at the bottom of the casing only.
48.000-300-000. Centralizers at Bottom of Hole and other Criti-
cal Points. Centralizers shall be attached to the bottom of the casing at
other critical grouting points such as zones of unsuitable water quality.
48.000-400-000 Centralizers at 25 Feet Intervals. Centralizers
shall be spaced at intervals not greater than 25 feet (7.5 m).
GEOPHYSICAL LOGGING FOR CEMENT BOND
48.000—010—000. Acoustic-Sonic Cement Bond Log. Upon com-
pletion of the cure of the grout, normally 72 hours but varying with
materials and additives used, an acoustic-sonic cement bond log shall be
run in the borehole from the top to bottom to determine the quality of
grout emplacements. The report of this test shall be delivered to the
OWNER or his representative for his permanent record. The interpretation
of such log shall be made by a log analyst of demonstrable experience with
such data.
PRESSURE TESTING OF GROUTING SEAL
48.000-001-000. Pressure Testing of Grouting Seal. Pressure
testing of the grout seal shall be employed following the appropriate time
for curing of the grout according to all appropriate provisions in this
Article. A pressure of 7 to 10 pounds of air per square inch is to be
maintained within the well, without the addition of more air, for a period
of not less than one hour. Any loss of air shall be construed as indicating
a defective seal. To correct such a defect, the OWNER shall require the
CONTRACTOR to make the necessary repairs by re-cementing and pres-
sure testing at 15 psi for one hour.
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR GROUTING
48.000-000-100. Method of Payment.
Option A (Lump Sum): All of the work performed under this Article
(48) shall be paid for as a lump sum.
Option B (Time and Materials) : All of the work performed under this
Article (48) shall-be paid for on the basis of the price bid for well con-
struction equipment per hour plus materials at cost plus percent of add-on
bid.
Option C (Unit Price): All of the following work performed under this
Article (48) shall be paid for at the unit price bid per hour for well con-
struction equipment plus the cost of any materials and/or subcontracted
services at the invoice price plus percent of add-on bid.
a. Furnish and Install Grout Unit Price per Sack
b. Cement Bond Log Unit Price per Foot
c. Pumping Grout Service Lump Sum
d. Pressure Testing of Grouting Lump Sum
87
-------
Article 49
Well Screens and Perforations
PREAMBLE
In unconsolidated materials, and under certain conditions in consoli-
dated materials, openings must be placed in the lining opposite the water-
bearing material to allow the water to flow into the well. At the same time
the entrance of fine material during pumping must be prevented or mini-
mized. This is done by developing the well in such a way that the natural,
or artificially introduced, coarse-grained materials, in conjunction with
appropriate-sized openings, retain the fines while permitting the water to
enter without excessive head loss. Thus, there are two basic types of wells
in unconsolidated formations, naturally developed well and those with an
artificially introduced filter. In normal practice, particularly with domestic
wells, natural formations permit the construction of naturally developed
wells. In some instances as discussed hereafter, artificial filters are recom-
mended.
During the process of development the finer materials from the aqui-
fer (s) are removed so that only the coarser materials are in contact with
the screen. In formations where the materials surrounding the screen are
more uniform in grain size and are graded in such a way that the fine
grains will not clog the screen, the developed graded materials form what
is called a "natural pack". In formations which lack coarse-grained mate-
rials and grading is uniform, materials having a grain size coarser than
the natural formation are placed around the screen to accomplish this pur-
pose. Such a well is called an artifically packed well or, in many areas, a
gravel-packed well (because fine gravels are used for packing).
Artificially packed wells are usually justified when the aquifer is non-
homogeneous, has uniformity coefficient less than 3.0, and has an effective
grain size less than 0.01 inch. If aquifers are less than 5 feet (1.5 m)
thick and separated vertically by less than 5 feet (1.5 m), the artificial fil-
ter should be used providing that more than 5 feet (1.5 m) of screen is
required and regardless of the homogeneity or uniformity coefficient of the
aquifer formation. Artificial packs are sometimes needed to stabilize well-
graded aquifers having a large percentage of fine materials in order to
avoid excessive settlement of materials above the screen, where the over-
lying formations consist of thin beds of fine sand, clay and gravel, or to
permit the use of larger screen slots. In addition, in poorly consolidated
rock that tends to disintegrate and cave at the time of pumping, an arti-
ficial pack may be needed.
To reduce the possibility of corrosion, the well screen and its end fit-
tings should be fabricated of the same material (type 304 Stainless Steel,
Silicon Bronze, Silicon Red Brass, Monel 400, Armco Iron, Mild Steel,
Plastic, Reinforced Fiberglass, etc.—the choice should be selected on the
basis of chemical analysis of the water or prior knowledge of the water
88
-------
quality.) Blank sections used in combination with screens may or may not
be of the same material as the screens; however, potential corrosion dam-
age should be considered in such installations.
The well screen aperture openings, screen length and diameter should be
selected so as to have sufficient open area to transmit the desired yield with
an aperture (slot) entrance velocity equal to or less than 6 feet per minute
(0.1 foot per second).
Screen sections are normally joined by welded or threaded connections.
If joints are to be welded, the welding rod must be made of material suit-
able for joining corrosion resistant materials in a manner so as not to re-
duce that resistance. Where dissimilar metals are joined a dielectric coup-
ling should be used.
The well screen (s) should be set at an elevation, or elevations, in mul-
tiple zones, that approximate the best producing zone or zones. The selec-
tion of such settings should be based on results of an analysis of the for-
mations penetrated as recorded in the driller's log, stratigraphic log and
electric logs (if available).
Screen length should be selected by the following criteria:
A. When the formation being screened is homogeneous and the ground
water is under artesian pressure:
1. If less than 25 feet thick, use a length equal to 70 percent of
the formation thickness.
2. If between 25 feet and 50 feet thick, use a length equal to 75
percent of the formation thickness.
3. If more than 50 feet thick, use a length equal to 80 percent of
the formation thickness.
B. When the formation being screened is not homogeneous and ground
water is under artesian pressure, select the more permeable sec-
tions from:
1. Laboratory tests of permeability, if representative samples are
available.
2. Sieve analyses.
3. Geophysical logs.
4. Visual inspection, if CCTV or photographic coverage of entire
interval is available.
C. If the formation being screened is homogeneous and the ground
water is unconfined (water table conditions) screen the lower one-
third of the formation.
D. If the formation being screened is not homogeneous (highly stra-
tified) and is under unconfined conditions, common practice is to
select the screen length as one-third the aquifer thickness. The
screen is usually set in the lowest, most permeable sand. Tests
should be made to establish the location of the most productive
zone.
89
-------
The above rules are designed to obtain the maximum yield from the
well. If a lesser yield is specified, such as for a domestic well, for example,
use the above rules until enough screen is indicated to obtain an entrance
velocity of 6 feet per minute or less.
Six feet per minute (0.1 fps) is a generally accepted value for maximum
screen entrance velocity. A lower entrance velocity is recommended for
water of significant incrusting potential.
TABLE 11.—Maximum Screen Entrance Velocities
(Adapted from Illinois State Water Survey, Bull 49, p. 29)
Coefficient of permeability
(gpd/sq. ft.) (Ipd/m2)
>6000
6000
5000 .
4000 . .
3000
2500
2000 .
1500 . .
1000
500
<500
>245,000
. . 245,000
. . 204,000
163,000
122,000
102,000
82,000
61,000
41,000
20,000
<20,000
Maximum screen entrance
(fpm) (fps)
>6
6
6
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
<2
>0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.08
0.08
0.07
0.07
0.05
<0.03
velocities*
(cm/s)
>3.05
3.05
3.05
3.05
3.05
2.54
2.54
2.03
2.03
1.52
<1.02
* See Water Well Technology, 1974, (3rd printing) published by McGraw-Hill, New York.
(Chapter 10, Well Hydraulics, pp. 223-238).
FILTER TYPE SELECTION
49.100—000—000. Filter Type Selection. For a non-homogeneous
aquifer, having a uniformity coefficient less than 3.0 and an effective grain
size less than 0.01 inches, an artificial filter shall be used as described in
Article 50. The uniformity coefficient is the ratio of the sieve size that will
retain 40 percent of the aquifer materials to the effective size. The effec-
tive size is the sieve size that will retain 90 percent of the aquifer materials.
For non-homogeneous aquifers less than 5 feet (1.5 m) thick and sepa-
rated vertically by less than 5 feet (1.5 m), the artificial filter will be used
as described in Article 50, providing that more than 5 feet (1.5 m) of the
screen is required, and regardless of the uniformity coefficient of the aqui-
fer material.
SCREEN-TYPE SELECTION
49.010-000-000. Contractor's Choice. The CONTRACTOR shall
select the screen type to be used so that the entrance velocity does not ex-
ceed 6 feet per minute (0.1 ft. per second).
49.020-000-000. Perforated Pipe. After the pipe has been placed
in the well, the specified sections shall be perforated by a casing perforator
or by shooting. The total area of openings shall be such that the design
entrance velocity shall not exceed 6 feet per minute (0.1 foot per second).
90
-------
Size, i.e. width and length, number, and location of perforations must be
reported by the CONTRACTOR on the well log.
49.030-000-000. Punched (With Material Removed) and
Slotted Pipe. The screen shall consist of a pipe that has been punched
(with the material removed) or slotted by torch, saw, mill, casting, or
other similar means. The slots shall be equal in width as nearly as prac-
tical, if slotted, or of uniform spacing and dimensions, if punched. The
total area of openings shall be such that the design entrance velocity shall
not exceed 6 feet per minute (0.1 foot per second).
49.040-000-000. Reinforced Wire Wrapped Punched Pipe. The
screen shall consist^ of perforated pipe reinforced with longitudinal bars
and wrapped with wire, the wire having a cross section such as to form
between each two adjacent loops of wire an opening so shaped as to in-
crease in size as the slot extends inward. The wire will be firmly attached
to the bars which are attached to the pipe. The total open area shall be
such that the design entrance velocity shall not exceed 6 feet per minute
(0.1 foot per second).
49.050-000-000. Artifical Filter Screen (Precast). The screen
shall be constructed by bonding graded silica particles around a slotted
core pipe. The total open area shall be such that the entrance velocity of
water at the design condition shall not exceed six (6) feet per minute (0.1
foot per second).
49.060-000-000. Louvred Pipe. The screen shall consist of a pipe
that has punched openings in it where material has not been removed. The
openings formed shall be between the corner of the outside of the pipe
and the punched-out area, and the corner of the inside of the punched
portion and its side. The openings shall be uniform and their total area
shall be such that the entrance velocity at the design condition shall not
exceed 6 feet per minute (0.1 foot per second).
49.070-000-000. Continuous Slot Wire Wound Screen. The
screen shall be constructed of wound wire, reinforced with longitudinal
bars, the bars having a cross section that will form an opening between
each adjacent coil of wire that is shaped in such a manner as to increase
in size inward. The wire shall be firmly attached to the bars which will, in
turn, be attached to a coupling adapter. The total open area shall be such
that the entrance velocity at the design condition shall not exceed 6 feet per
minute (0.1 foot per second).
SCREEN APERATURE SIZE
f49.001—000—000. Contractor's Choice. The screen aperture size
shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR where there is a guarantee
of yield except that the entrance velocity shall not exceed feet
(. m) per minute.
49.002-000-000. Aperture Size Selection Criteria. The screen
aperature size shall be based on the following criteria.
91
-------
A. Where the uniformity coefficient of the aquifer is greater than 6
and the aquifer is overlain by an essentially non-caving forma-
tion, the aperature size shall be that which retains 30 percent of
the aquifer sample.
B. Where the uniformity coefficient of the aquifer is greater than 6
and the aquifer is overlain by a readily caving formation, the
aperature size shall be that which retains 50 percent of the aqui-
fer sample.
C. Where the uniformity coefficient of the aquifer is 3 or lower and
the aquifer is overlain by an essentially non-caving formation,
the aperture size shall be that which retains 40 percent of the
aquifer sample.
D. Where the uniformity coefficient of the aquifer is 3 or lower and
the aquifer is overlain by a caving formation, the aperture size
shall be that which retains 60 percent of the aquifer sample.
E. For conditions between the extremes listed, the CONTRACTOR
shall interpolate to obtain the proper screen aperture size.
F. Where a formation to be screened has layers of differing grain
sizes and gradations, use the following rule: If the 50 percent
size of the coarsest layer is less than 4 times the 50 percent size
of the finest layer, the aperture size shall be selected on the basis
of the finest layer, or for each specific layer is indicated in A, B,
C, D, or E.
G. If the water is corrosive or the accuracy of the chemical analysis
is in doubt, select an aperture size that will retain 10 percent
more than is indicated in the above paragraphs.
H. Where fine sand overlies coarse sand, use the fine sand size aper-
ture for the top two feet (61 cm) of the underlying coarse sand.
The coarse size aperture shall not be larger than twice the fine
sand size.
I. Where an artificial filter is to be used the aperture size selection
criteria shall be in accordance with Article 50.002—000—000.
SCREEN LENGTH
49.000-100-000. Contractor's Choice. The CONTRACTOR shall
select the screen length and interval to be screened provided, however, that
the resulting average calculated entrance velocity at the design pumping rate
shall not exceed 6 feet per minute (0.1 foot per second).
49.000-200-000. Screen Selection Criteria. The length of the
screen for an artesian aquifer shall be such that at least 80 percent of the
aquifer is screened. The screen shall be centered in the aquifer. The length
of the screen for a water table aquifer shall be between 1/3 and 1/2 of
the aquifer thickness. The screen should be positioned in the lower 1/3
or 1/2 of the aquifer. In no instance shall the well screen entrance velocity
exceed 0.1 foot per second (Aquifer thickness as used here is the total
92
-------
thickness of the sand formation to be screened or, where geophysical logs
indicate a specific water-bearing zone, the term refers to the total thickness
of the sand formation as indicated by the geophysical log.) For any spe-
cified discharge screen of sufficient length shall be installed to obtain an
entrance velocity not exceeding 6 feet per minute (0.1 foot per second).
METHOD OF SCREEN INSTALLATION
49.000-010-000. Contractor's Choice. The screen shall be installed
according to the method deemed appropriate by the CONTRACTOR.
49.000-020-000. Driven Well Point Method. The well point screen
shall be attached to the casing and driven into the aquifer.
49.000-030-000. Washing Method. The screen shall be fitted with
a self-closing valve on the bottom. Next, the screen shall be attached to
the well casing. A smaller pipe shall then be placed in the screen and by
a method selected by the CONTRACTOR also fitted to the self-closing valve.
The screen with its casing shall then be "washed" into place by pumping
drilling fluid through the inner pipe.
49.000-040-000. Pull Back Method. The well casing shall be carried
through the formation to be screened and cleaned out to the level where
the bottom of the screen is to be placed. The screen shall then be lowered
to that level by means of a cable attached by a hook to the bail in the
bottom of the screen, or by attaching a pipe to a threaded fitting in the
bottom of the screen, and lowering the pipe with the screen. The screen
can also be placed by gravity under conditions that limit the rate of
descent. After the screen is in its proper location, a heavy steel bar or line
of pipe may be set on the screen bottom to hold it down and the casing
shall be raised until the screen is exposed to the aquifer with the packer,
or seal lapped 12 inches (30 cm) into the casing. If a lead packer is
used with a telescope-sized screen, it shall then be swedged against the
casing until it makes a water-tight seal.
49.000-050-000. Driven Through Casing Method. The casing
shall be set at a level immediately above the top of the formation or por-
tion of the formation to be screened. A well point screen shall be lowered
through the casing to the top of the formation by a cable and hook or an
attached string of pipe. The screen shall then be seated in the formation
by driving it to the desired depth and sealing it to the casing.
49.000-060-000. Bailed Through Casing Method. The casing shall
be placed at a level immediately above the top of the formation or portion
of the formation to be screened. A piece of plain tubing of the same mate-
rial as the screen and several feet long shall be attached to the bottom of
the screen. A similar piece, long enough to lap 3 feet (1 m) into the
casing, and a packer shall be attached to the top of the screen. The screen
and attachments shall then be lowered through the casing to the top of the
formation by cable and hook or an attached string of pipe. The screen
shall then be put into place by bailing the aquifer material out from under
93
-------
it and allowing it to settle. After the screen is in place, it shall be sealed
to the casing and the bottom tubing plugged.
49.000-070-000. Bailed or Air Jetted Through Casing Method.
The casing shall be placed at a level immediately above the top of the
formation or portion of the formation to be screened. A bail-down shoe
shall be attached to the screen and a line of bail-down pipe attached to
the shoe by a right and left-hand coupling, or similar release device. The
screen shall then be lowered by the bail-down pipe to the top of the aquifer
and then bailed into place or seated by blowing air through the bail-down
pipe. When the screen has reached the desired depth, the bail-down shoe
shall be plugged at the bottom by an approved method, and the screen
shall be sealed to the casing.
49.000-080-000. Washed Through Casing Method. The casing
shall be placed at a level immediately above the top of the formation to
be screened. The screen shall be fitted with a self-closing valve at the bot-
tom and a small inner pipe attached to the valve. The screen shall be
lowered through the casing by any means deemed appropriate. The screen
shall be washed into place by pumping drilling fluid through the inner
pipe. It shall then be sealed to the casing.
49.000-090-000. Suspended From Surface Method. The screen,
with closed bottom, shall be attached by an approved manner to the cas-
ing and lowered into the well with the casing. In no instance shall it be
driven or forced. It shall remain suspended from the surface until the
formation has collapsed against it or until a filter material or formation
stabilizer has been added.
METHOD OF JOINING SCREEN TO SCREEN
49.000—001—000. Joining. Screen sections for a single interval shall
be joined by threaded and coupled joints, socket-type fittings and solvent
welding, or electric arc or acetylene welding. Welding rods and methods
recommended by the screen manufacturer shall be employed. Resulting
joint(s) must be straight, sand tight and retain 100 percent of the screen
strength.
Blank spacers for multiple interval screen shall be of the same material
as the casing, unless otherwise specified. They shall be joined to the
screen by the threaded and coupled joints, socket-type fittings and solvent
welding, or electric arc or acetylene welding using materials and proce-
dures specified in Article 47.001-000-000. The resulting joints must be
straight, sand tight and retain 100 percent of the screen strength.
METHOD OF CONNECTING SCREEN TO CASING
49.000—000—100. Neoprene or Rubber Seal. A neoprene or rubber
seal especially made for this purpose shall be attached to the top of the
screen. It shall be designed to be self-sealing in the well casing.
49.000-000-200. Lead Packer. A lead packer especially made for
this purpose shall be attached to the top of the screen. After the screen is
94
-------
in place, the lead shall be expanded at its top to make a sand tight seal
with the well casing.
49.000-000-300. Cement Fill in Annulus. The casing shall be
joined to a pipe extending above and attached to the screen by filling the
space between them with neat cement for a vertical distance of 3 feet (1m)
and at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) thick.
49.000-000-400. Threaded, Coupled, Welded Joints. The casing
and screen shall be joined by threaded and coupled joints, socket fitting
and solvent welding, or electric arc or acetylene welding using materials
and procedures specified in Article 47. 001—000—000. The resulting joints
must be straight, sand tight and retain 100 percent of the screen strength.
METHODS OF SEALING BOTTOM
49.000-000-010. Lead Method. If lead shot is used, the bottom of
the deepest screen shall be sealed by installing an eight (8) inch layer of
number eight (8) lead shot in the bottom of the screen. If lead wool is
used, the bottom of the deepest screen shall be sealed by placing lead wool
in the bottom of the screen and tamping it to form a four (4) inch layer,
sealing the bottom.
49.000-000-020! Bag Cement Method. A pipe extension at least 4
nominal diameters in length shall be attached to the bottom of the deepest
screen (the drill hole having been deepened to accommodate the extension).
The bottom shall then be sealed by lowering into the extension pipe suffi-
cient dry cement in small cloth bags to fill it to a depth of at least 3
nominal diameters, packing it firmly into place.
49.000-000-030. Self-Closing Valve Method. The bottom of the
deepest screen shall be sealed by means of a self-closing valve on the bot-
tom of the screen.
49.000-000-040. Fabricated Plug Method. The bottom of the
deepest screen shall be sealed with a threaded or welded plug or point
made of the same material as the screen body.
49.000-000-050. Welded Plate Method (Casing Material).
The bottom of the deepest screen shall be closed by welding to it a plate
of the same material as the casing and of the same thickness.
49.000-000-060. Welded Plate Method (Screen Material). The
bottom of the deepest screen shall have a plate of the same material as
the screen welded to it to seal it.
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR WELL SCREENS
49.000-000-001. Method of Payment.
Option A (Lump Sum): All of the work performed under this Article
(49) shall be paid for as a lump sum.
Option B (Time and Materials): All of the work performed under this
Article (49) shall be paid for on the basis of the price bid for well con-
struction equipment per hour plus materials at cost plus percent of add-on
bid.
95
-------
Option C (Unit Price) : All of the following work performed under this
Article (49) shall be paid for at the unit price bid per hour for well con-
struction equipment plus the cost of any materials and/or subcontracted
services at the invoice price percent of add-on bid.
a.' Screen or Perforated Casing Furnished and
Installed Unit Price/Foot
Article 50
Well Filter Construction (Artificial)
PREAMBLE
A filter pack (gravel pack) consists of a clean sand or gravel of selected
grain size and gradation which is installed in the annular space between
the screen and the wall of the well bore. The filter has a larger average
grain size and usually a smaller coefficient of uniformity than the aquifer
material. This permits use of a larger screen slot size and consequent larger
open area so that entrance velocity is lowered and head losses to the well
are reduced. The filter has a considerably higher permeability than the
formation so that the effective diameter of the well is increased to some
extent. Both these factors tend to increase the efficiency and specific capacity
of a well and tend to reduce the possibility of excess sand production.
The grain size and gradation of the filter are selected to stabilize the
aquifer material and to permit only the fine fractions to move into the well
during development. Thus after development a correctly filtered well is
relatively sand-free, and a narrow annulus of the formation adjacent to
the filter has its permeability increased to some degree.
Generally, the thinner the filter the better. Actually a correctly designed
filter 1/2-inch thick would be adequate, but the mechanical difficulties of
satisfactorily placing such a filter preclude its use. From a practical stand-
joint, filter packs are usually about 4 to 8 inches (10 to 20 cm) thick.
In a shallow well with 6 inches or more of annular space and 5 or 6
feet (1.5 or 1.8 m) of screen the filter material can be easily dumped in
to give a satisfactory installation. In deep wells with longer screens, to
avoid bridging and segregation of the filter material, it should be placed
with great care. If placed by gravity the material should be introduced at
a metered, uniform rate. Frequently it is placed via a tremie pipe. Other
practices include washing or pumping the filter material in with water (as
a slurry) which is an effective way of placing the filter pack. Once instal-
lation of the filter material is started it should proceed at a uniform rate
until completed from the bottom of the well to a selected point above the
screen or perforations.
The filter pack should consist of clean, well-rounded grains that are
smooth and uniform. The filter should be siliceous with a limit of 5 per-
cent by weight of calcareous material. The filter should be obtained from
an approved source and should consist of hard, rounded particles with an
96
-------
average specific gravity of not less than 2.5. Not more than 1 percent by
weight of the material should have a specific gravity of 2.25 or less. The
filter should contain not more than 2 percent by weight of thin, flat or
elongated pieces (pieces in which the largest dimension exceeds three times
the smallest dimension) determined by hand picking; and should be free
of shale, mica, clay, sand, dirt, loam, and organic impurities of any kind
and should contain no iron or manganese in a form or quantity that will
adversely affect the water quality. Samples of the filter to be furnished
should be submitted for approval by the supplier before shipment.
Samples of filter material, including sieve analysis, shall be submitted
tov the OWNER for Approval in advance of delivery and placement. The
filter material should be delivered to the site upon approval of same by the
OWNER. Suitable storage area for the gravel should be provided by the
CONTRACTOR. The gravel may be delivered, bagged and stacked at the
site or it may be delivered in bulk. If delivered in bulk it should be placed
on a protective sheet preventing contact between it and the ground. It
should be protected from the elements by a suitable covering.
The OWNER or the PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE should obtain two
grab samples from each load of filter material delivered and carry out or
have carried out by others a mechanical analysis of these samples to deter-
mine that the filter material complies with the grain size and uniformity
specified.
If more than one grade of filter material is to be installed in the well
simultaneously, the grades of gravel should be mixed at the surface before
introduction into the well. Mixing is the responsibility of the CONTRAC-
TOR; however, the OWNER or PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE should
approve a suitable method prior to the CONTRACTOR'S commencement
of mixing operations. Regardless of the method of mixing used, there must
be no chance of contamination of the filter material during mixing. The
annular space between the well screen and the wall of the hole should be
filled with clean, disinfected, selected gravel to form a bed around the well
screen. This filter bed should be graded from fine to coarse as conditions
may require. The filter material should be introduced through pipes or by
a method approved by the OWNER or his agent where the filter material
is installed directly into the open hole. Every precaution should be taken
which will insure the proper placing of the filter material continuously
from the bottom of the well to a point above the well screen without sepa-
ration of the materials as they are introduced into the well.
When placing a filter in a well, care must be taken to assure that any
filter material that enters the well screen during placement is removed
during development.
FILTER-TYPE SELECTION
50.100—000—000. General Criteria. If the formation is non-homo-
geneous, has a uniformity coefficient greater than 3.0, and has an effective
grain greater than 0.001 inches, a natural filter shall be used.
97
-------
FILTER CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
50.010—000—000. General. For standards on Screen-Type Selection,
Screen Length, Method of Installation, Method of Joining, Method of
Sealing Screen Position and Payment for these services Article 49 shall
apply.
SELECTION OF FILTER GRAIN SIZE
AND SCREEN APERATURE SIZE
50.001-000-000. Contractor's Choice. Selection of the filter grain
size shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility.
50.002-000-000. Selection Criteria. The filter grain size shall be
determined by taking the 70 percent retained grain size of the finest for-
mation to be filtered and multiplying it by 4, 5, or 6. This is the 70 per-
cent retained grain size of the filter material to be used. The uniformity
coefficient (the size of sieve that retains 40 percent of the sample divided
by the size that retains 90 percent) shall not be greater than 2.5. The
gradation of the filter material shall form a smooth and gradual size dis-
tribution curve when plotted. The screen aperture openings shall be of
such size as to retain between 85 and 100 percent of the filter material.
The thickness of the filter shall range from a minimum of 3 inches (10
cm) to approximately 8 inches (20 cm).
LENGTH OF ARTIFICIAL FILTER
50.000-100-000. The filter material shall extend a distance equal 2V2
times the largest diameter of the well above any screen. Sand, cement, or
additional filter material shall be placed between the filter material and
the lower limit of the sanitary seal, according to state and local regula-
tions. The size of the sand shall be such that it will not infiltrate into the
filter material.
50.000-200-000. The filter material shall extend from a point equal in
distance to 2Vs times the largest diameter of the well below the lowest
screen to the same distance above the highest screen. Sand, cement, or addi-
tional filter material shall be placed between the filter material and the
lower limit of the sanitary seal, according to state and local regulations.
The size of the sand shall be such that it will not infiltrate into the filter
material.
50.000-300-000. The filter material shall extend from a point equal
in distance to 2!/2 times the largest diameter of the well below the lowest
screen to a point 50 feet (15 m) above the lower end of the outer, or
surface, casing where well depth permits.
50.000—400—000. The filter shall extend from a point equal in dis-
tance 2l/2 times the largest diameter of the well below the lowest screen to
the land surface. Suitable accompanying well design features will include
(1) filter zone in the upper section of the well will be surrounded with
casing and (2) cemented into place via the provisions applicable in
Articles 47 and 48 to insure a sanitary seal.
98
-------
STORAGE OF FILTER MATERIAL
50.000-010-000. Bulk Delivery—Open Storage. The filter mate
rial shall be delivered in bulk and stored on the bare ground. The layer of
filter material in contact with the ground shall not be used.
50.000-020-000. Bulk Delivery—Covered Storage. The filter
material shall be delivered in bulk and stored on a surface covered with
a clean material such as plastic or canvas. The filter material shall be cov-
ered in a similar manner to prevent any contamination of its surface.
50.000-030-000. Bagged Delivery. The filter material shall be de-
livered in bags and shall be protected from the weather and contamination
until used.
DISINFECTION OF FILTER MATERIAL
50.000-001-000. Disinfection. The CONTRACTOR shall be respon-
sible for insuring that the filter material is adequately disinfected during
installation, particularly if the well is to be used for domestic purposes or
as a public water supply. Procedures for disinfecting the material shall be
in accordance with Article 54.
METHOD OF INSTALLATION OF FILTER MATERIAL
50.000-000-100. Poured. The filter material shall be poured in the
annular space between the borehole wall and the casing attached to the
screen at a measured and uniform rate.
50.000-000-200. Poured with fluid. The filter material shall be
poured into the annular space between the borehole wall and the casing
attached to the screen. Water or drilling fluid shall be pumped through
the inner casing at the same time and allowed to flow upward on the out-
side of the inner casing.
50.000-000-300. Tremie Placed. The filter material shall be placed
by the use of a tremie pipe lowered to the bottom of the space to be packed
and slowly raised as the filter material fills the annular space. As the
filter material is poured into the tremie pipe, water shall also be poured
in to help carry the filter material.
50.000-000-400. Tremie Placed with Fluid. The filter shall be
placed by the use of a tremie pipe lowered to the bottom of the space to be
packed and slowly raised as the filter is placed. Water or thin drilling
fluid shall be pumped from the inner casing and allowed to flow into or
be pumped in with the filter material.
50.000-000-500. Tremie with Ell. A tremie pipe with an ell formed
on its bottom to direct its discharge perpendicular to the long axis of the
screen shall be lowered to the bottom of the space to be packed and the
filter shall be placed by pumping water or drilling fluid through the tremie
pipe with the filter material being added to the fluid being pumped. Pres-
sure shall be maintained that will keep the filter material in suspension in
the annulus. The tremie shall be gradually raised as the pack is injected.
50.000-000-600. Crossover Tool. The filter material shall be placed
99
-------
by pumping it to a point above the screen through a "cross-over" tool and
then allowed to fall as the drilling fluid is circulated through the bottom
of the screen via an inner removable pipe.
METHOD OF PAYMENT
FOR ARTIFICIAL WELL FILTER
50.000-000-010. Method of Payment.
Option A (Lump Sum): All of the work performed under this Article
(50) shall be paid for as a lump sum.
Option B (Time and Materials): All of the work performed under this
Article (50) shall be paid for on the basis of price bid for well construc-
tion equipment per hour plus materials at cost plus percent of add-on bid.
Option C (Unit Price): All of the following work performed under this
Article (50) shall be paid for at the unit price bid per hour for well con-
struction equipment plus the cost of any materials and/or subcontracted
services at the invoice price plus percent of add-on bid:
a. Artificial Well Filter Furnished and Installed. .. .Unit Price/Foot
b. Filter material Unit Price /Cu. Yd.
Article 51
Well Plumbness and Alignment
PREAMBLE
Plumbness and alignment of a well are never perfect. In relatively shal-
low holes, particularly those where the smallest inside diameter of the well
is considerably larger than the maximum outside diameter of pumping
equipment in the well, some deviation in plumbness and alignment seldom
causes serious problems. The CONTRACTOR can keep alignment within
practical limits by exercising reasonable care under most conditions.
Plumbness and alignment become critical on deep holes and/or where a
vertical turbine pump is to be permanently installed in the well. Manufac-
turers of turbine pumps state that their pumps will operate satisfactorily
when considerably inclined from the vertical. However, a well badly out of
alignment and containing kinks, bends, or corkscrews should be rejected
because such deviations cause severe wear on the pump shaft, bearings and
discharge casings and under extreme conditions might make it impossible
to get a pump into or out of the well. Conditions that cause wells to be-
come crooked or out of plumb include the nature of the material pene-
trated while drilling, trueness of well casing, tension of cable tool drilling
line, and pull-down force on drill pipe in rotary drilling. Solutions for the
problems vary as widely as do the conditions which cause the problems.
METHODS OF TESTING
51.100-000-000. Plumbness and Alignment Test. The completed
well shall be sufficiently plumb and straight so that there will be no inter-
100
-------
ference with installation, alignment, operation or future removal of the
permanent well pump.
t51.200-000-000. Plumbness and Alignment Test. All wells should
be constructed and all casings and liners set round, plumb, and true to
line as denned herein. To demonstrate the compliance of the work with the
requirements, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, tools and equip-
ment and perform the test or tests described herein. The test for plumb-
ness and alignment shall be made following construction of the well, and
before test pump equipment is installed.
Alignment shall be tested by lowering into the well to a depth of at
least feet (lowest anticipated pump setting) a section of pipe
40 feet (12 m) long or a dummy of the same length. The outer diam-
eter of the pipe or dummy shall be not more than % inch (1-3 cm)
smaller than the inside diameter of that part of the casing or hole being
tested when the casing diameter is a nominal 10 inches (25 cm) or less.
When the nominal diameter of the casing being tested is 12 inches (30
cm) or greater, the outer diameter of the test pipe or dummy shall not be
more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) smaller than the inside diameter of that part
of the casing or hole being tested. The dummy when lowered into the cas-
ing shall pass freely the entire depth of the well.
The test for plumbness shall be made with a plummet. Construct a tri-
pod or frame "B" similar to that shown in Figure 2. The center of the
pulley "C" should be exactly 10 feet above the top of the well. The pulley
must be so located that the plumb line "A" will come off its outer edge
exactly over the center "D" of the well casing.
Make the plumb ring or plunger "E" !/4 inch smaller in diameter than
the inside diameter of the well casing. It can be made from a piece of
sheet steel or a short piece of pipe. Whichever is used, it must be heavy
enough to keep the plumb line taut. The hub of the ring must not be solid
as the water must pass through it as it is lowered in the well. The hole
"F" through which the plumb line "A" passes must be in the exact center
of the ring. Knots or marks should be made every 10 feet on the plumb
line, to indicate the depth the ring has been lowered in the well.
The well characteristics are determined by lowering the plumb ring 10
feet at a time and taking a reading at each location. If the plumb line
passes exactly through the center line "D" at any location, the well is
plumb at the depth the plumb ring is suspended. However, if the line "A"
does not pass through "D", the well at that depth is out of plumb by an
amount equal to distance "A" from "D" plus an equal distance for each
10 feet that the plumb ring "E" is below the floor level. For example, as-
sume that "C" is exactly 10 feet above floor level and "D" is at floor level.
If plumb line "A" is l/16th of an inch from the center line of the well at
"D" and the plumb ring "E" is 10 feet below the floor line, then the well
is l/8th of an inch out of plumb at the 10 foot level. If "A" is l/16th
inch from the center of the well at "D" when the plumb ring "E" is 50
101
-------
Figure 2.
Well Plumbness Test Assembly
EXACT CENTER
GUIDE F-
PULLEY
"C"
PLUMB PLUMB
LINE RING"E"
"A"
FRAME "B"
EVERY 1O FT.
102
-------
feet below the floor line at "D". Then the well is l/16th plus 5/16ths, or
3/8ths of an inch out of plumb at the 50 foot level. This is simply the pro-
portion of similar triangles, and expressed in that way, variation from
plumb equals,
60 ft. 1 63
X
10 ft. 16 ~ 16 8
This reading at the various depths tested may be plotted on cross sec-
tion paper and an accurate diagram of the well developed.
Should the plumb or dummy fail to move freely through the specified
length of casing or hole, or should the well vary from the vertical in ex-
cess of two-thirds of the smallest inside diameter of that part of the well
being tested per 100 feet (30.48 m) of depth, the plumbness and align-
ment of the well shall be corrected by the CONTRACTOR at his own ex-
pense. Records of deflection readings and all other pertinent information
shall be kept and made a part of the permanent well log and record.
Should the CONTRACTOR fail to correct the faulty alignment and
plumbness, the OWNER or his Representative may refuse to accept
the well. The OWNER or his representative may modify the requirements
for plumbness in this Article if in his judgment (a) the CONTRAC-
TOR has exercised all possible care in construction of the well and the
defect is due to circumstances beyond his control; (b) the utility of the
completed well will not be materially affected; or (c) the cost of necessary
remedial measures will be excessive. In no event will the provisions of this
paragraph with respect to alignment be waived when it is anticipated that
the well will be pumped with a line-shaft turbine pump.
51.300-000-000. Drift Indicator Survey. A mechanical drift indi-
cator shall be run in the hole and the drift determined at intervals of 50
feet (15.24 m) of depth to the total depth of the hole. If a deflection of
less than one degree is indicated, the well shall be deemed in proper plumb-
ness and alignment. If any reading taken indicates a deflection from verti-
cal exceeding one degree, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify the
OWNER or his representative. The mechanical drift indicator surveys
taken to and including that point shall be analyzed by the CONTRACTOR
and the OWNER and, if in the opinion of the OWNER or his repre-
sentative the alignment is not acceptable the CONTRACTOR will be
required to correct the alignment or abandon and plug the hole as directed
by the OWNER, and to drill at his expense another hole. Upon completion
of the hole or at any time prior thereto, in case of disagreement between
the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER as to the mechanical drift, indicator
disc interpretations, the mechanical drift indicator discs shall be analyzed
by a service company and two copies of the service company's interpreta-
tion of the survey shall be supplied to the OWNER. This interpretation
shall be binding on both parties. The selection of the service company
103
-------
making the interpretation shall be by agreement of both the OWNER or
CONTRACTOR.
Records of deflection readings and all other pertinent information shall
be kept and made part of the permanent well log and record. The OWNER
may modify the requirements for plumbness in this Article if in his judg-
ment (a) the CONTRACTOR has exercised all possible care in construct-
ing the well and the defect is due to circumstances beyond his control;
(b) the utility of the completed well will not be materially affected; or
(c) the cost of necessary remedial measures will be excessive.
METHOD OF PAYMENT
FOR WELL PLUMBNESS AND ALIGNMENT
51.010-000-000. Method of Payment.
Option A (Lump Sum): All of the work performed under this Article
(51) shall be paid for as a lump sum.
Option B (Time and Materials): All of the work performed under this
Article (51) shall be paid for on the basis of the price bid for well con-
struction equipment per hour plus materials at cost plus percent of add-on
bid.
Option C (Unit Price): All of the following work performed under this
Article (51) shall be paid for at the unit price bid per hour for well con-
struction equipment plus the cost of any materials and/or subcontracted
services at the invoice price plus percent of add-on bid:
a. Plumbness and Alignment Lump Sum/Test
b. Drift Indicator Lump Sum/Test
Article 52
Well Development
PREAMBLE
Proper well development can sometimes make a poor well into a good
one. Without proper development an otherwise excellent well may never be
satisfactory. Proper development will improve almost any well regardless
of type or size, and only under unusual circumstances or because of im-
proper methods will it do harm. Practically all methods of drilling cause
compaction of unconsolidated materials in an annulus of variable thickness
about a drill hole. In addition, fines are driven into the wall of the hole,
drilling mud invasion may occur to a greater or less extent, and a mud
cake may form on the wall of the hole. In consolidated formations similar
compaction may occur in some poorly cemented rocks, where cuttings,
fines and mud are forced into fractures, bedding planes and other open-
ings, and a mud cake forms on the wall of the hole. All of these condi-
tions reduce the permeability of the formation adjacent to the well and act
to reduce the yield and increase the draw-down.
104
-------
Proper well development breaks down the compacted borehole wall,
liquefies jelled mud, and draws it and other fines which have penetrated
the aquifer or were initially present in it into the well, from which they
are removed by bailing or pumping. This creates a more permeable and
stable zone about the screen. This stabilization of the formation adjacent
to the well screen practically eliminates sand pumping, and contributes to
a more efficient well, longer well life, and reduced operation and mainte-
nance costs.
Numerous methods of development are available and the literature con-
tains considerable discussion of the suitability of each method in various
types of formations. An important factor in any method is that the de-
velopment work be started slowly and gently and increased in vigor as the
well is developed. All but one method of well development require the
application of sufficient energy to disturb the natural formation or filter
pack so as to free the fines and allow them to be drawn into the wall, and
to cause the coarser fractions to settle around and stabilize the screen.
This is usually accomplished by the surging of water into and out of the
well and the formation. The exception is hydraulic jetting, which depends
upon a high velocity water jet discharging through the screen. The jets
disturb both the filter and formation and the water, following the path
of least resistance, returns to the well above and below the jets, carrying
the fines into the well.
Determination of the adequacy of development is largely a matter of
experience and judgment but as a general rule if interrupted overpumping
or rawhiding is used as a final method of development the degree of de-
velopment can be estimated from sand samples caught in an Imhoff cone
or by other methods on each resumption of pumping. On initiation of
interrupted pumping, samples should be caught as frequently as possible
as soon as discharge starts at each new rate of pumping. Sampling of this
type at each rate of discharge will show the time required for maximum
sand content to occur and will serve as a guide to subsequent sampling
and development.
Shortly after the period in which maximum sand content occurs in the
discharge for each new rate of pumping, the discharge will become prac-
tically sand free until the well is again surged. As rawhiding continues,
the amount of sand at the maximum will decrease and the time in each
discharge interval until water of low sand content is discharged becomes
shorter.
The more commonly used methods of well development are listed as
follows:
A. Pumping
B. Surging
a. Valved Surge Device
b. Solid Surge Device
105
-------
c. Pumping with Surge Device
d. Air Surge
C. Fracturing
a. Explosives
b. High Pressure Fluid Injection
D. Washing
a. High Pressure Jetting -
b. Backwashing
Requests for bids on a lump sum basis for development may result in
unsatisfactory work. It is practically impossible to anticipate how a well
will respond to development and how long it will take to achieve adequate
development. It is better to provide for development on a unit price per
hour basis and continue development until the desired sand content at
the design discharge are achieved.
The casing and screen diameters, length of screen and character of the
formation are determining factors in the selection of applicable methods of
well development. The following paragraphs apply to the most commonly
used methods summarized above for various types and sizes of wells. That
all methods are not covered does not signify that those omitted are not
satisfactory but only that they are less commonly used or are of limited
applicable.
Testing For Sand In Water
One method of growing popularity is the Centrifugal Sand Sampler.
Water enters the body of the device at a tangent immediately below the
baffle. Any sand present will fall to the bottom of the centrifuge tube. The
flow is maintained at a constant value, independent of inlet pressure via
a flow-control valve this is rated at 0.5 GPM. The sand content can be
computed since the flow through the tester is known.
PUMPING OR BAILING METHOD
52.100—000—000. Continuous Over pumping. The development
process shall include development by uninterrupted pumping at pumping
rates up to 1^2 times the design capacity.
52.200-000-000. Interrupted Overpumping. The development
process shall include development by interrupted pumping. The pumping
shall be done with a pump capable of pumping at rates up to 2 times
the design capacity. The pumping should be carried out in at least 5 steps.
These steps should include pumping rates of 14, V^ 1> 1% ar>d 2 times
the design capacity, with no check valve nor foot valve present. Pumping
shall be conducted in 5 minute cycles, and shall continue a minimum of 2
hours or until such time as acceptable standards are attained.
52.300-000-000. Surging and Bailing (Utilizing Bailer). The
development process shall include surging and bailing the well. The surg-
ing shall be accomplished by utilizing the bailer as a surging device. If
106
-------
fines have been drawn into the well and have settled on the bottom and
accumulated to a depth where they block 10 percent or more of the total
screen length, the well shall be bailed or otherwise cleaned to the bottom
before resumption of surging. On completion of development the well shall
be cleaned to the bottom.
52.400-000-000. Surging and Bailing (Utilizing Surge Block).
The development process shall be carried out by surging and bailing the
well. The surging shall be done by a single or double solid (or valved)
surge block. Surging shall start at the bottom of the lowest screen in the
well and proceed upwards.
MECHANICAL SURGING AND PUMPING METHOD
52.010—000—000. Surging and Pumping. The development process
shall include surging and pumping the well. The surging shall be done by
either a solid or valved surge block. The pumping shall be done through
the surge block which incorporates a piece of the suction pipe in the fab-
rication of the block. Pumping shall be done simultaneously with the
surging at rates up to !/2 of the design capacity. Fines drawn into the well
shall be pumped out periodically before such accumulation reaches 10 per-
cent of the screen length. Upon completion of the development work the
well shall be cleaned to the bottom.
HYDRAULIC JETTING METHOD
52.001-000-000. Hydraulic Jetting. Development shall be accom-
plished by simultaneous high-velocity, horizontal-jetting and pumping. The
outside diameter of the jetting tool shall be one inch less in diameter than
the screen inside diameter. The minimum exit velocity of the jetting fluid
at the jet nozzle shall be 150 ft./sec. The tool shall be rotated at a speed
less than one rpm. It shall be positioned at one level for not less than two
minutes and then shall be moved to the next level which shall be no more
than 6 inches vertically from the preceding jetting level. The jetting shall
proceed from the bottom of the screen to the top. Pumping from the well
shall be at a rate of 5 to 15 percent more than the rate at which water is
introduced through the jetting tool. Water to be used for jetting must
contain less than 1 ppm suspended solids.
AIR DEVELOPMENT METHOD
52.000-100-000. Single Pipe System Open to Atmosphere.
Development shall be done by the utilization of a single pipe air pumping
system using the casing or the bore hole itself as the eductor line. The
compressors, air lines, hoses, fittings, etc. shall be of adequate size to pump
the well by the air lift principle at 1% to 2 times the design capacity of
the well. The CONTRACTOR shall initially pump the well with air until the
well is developed to the point that it yields clear, sand-free water. He shall
then shut off the air and allow water in the well to return to a static con-
dition. He shall then reopen the valve and reintroduce air into the well
107
-------
until water is again brought to the surface by the air lift, at which time
he will close the air valve and allow the water to drop back down the well
and return to a static condition. He shall repeat this lifting and dropping
of the column of water until the water in the well becomes turbid at which
lime he will continuously pump the well with air until it again yields
clear sand-free water. The CONTRACTOR shall repeat the above operations
until the well no longer produces fine material when it is surged and
backwashed as described above.
The bottom of the air line shall be placed at different levels in order to
facilitate development of all intake areas and multiple water producing
zones, and the process repeated until all zones yield water free of turbidity
when surged and backwashed.
52.000-200-000. Single Pipe System Closed to Atmosphere.
The CONTRACTOR shall install a suitable valve on the discharge line lead-
ing from the top of the casing, secure the air line into blowing tee or ell
affixed to a valved air connection on the top of the casing. He shall then
close the valve on the discharge line, attach the air hose to the valved
fitting and introduce air into the well, forcing the column of water in
the well down. Care shall be exercised to prevent air from entering the
water-bearing formation. This shall be accomplished by the installation
of a separate pipe, open to the atmosphere at the top, and installed in the
well to a point ten feet above the water-bearing zone. When the water level
in the well is forced down to the bottom of this air release pipe, the dis-
charge valve shall be opened and the water allowed to rise back to the
static level. This procedure may be repeated and/or alternated with the
"Single Pipe System Open to the Atmosphere" technique. A pressure
gauge and relief valve shall be installed at the top of the casing when
this system is used.
52.000-300-000. Two Pipe System. The development process shall
be carried out by the utilization of an air introducing pipe and an air
and water eductor line. The compressors, air lines, hoses, fittings, etc.,
shall be of adequate size to pump the well by the air lift method at l^j to
2 times the design capacity of the well. The CONTRACTOR shall initially
develop the well as outlined in Article 52.000-200-000, the "Single Pipe
System Closed to the Atmosphere," with the air line introducing air into
the eductor line at a point above the bottom of the eductor line. When
the well yields clear sand-free water, the air line shall be lowered to a point
below the bottom of the eductor line and air introduced until the water
between the eductor pipe and the casing is raised to the surface. At this
time the air line shall be raised back up into the eductor line causing the
water to be pumped from the well through the eductor line. The procedure
of alternating the relative positions of the air and eductor line shall be
repeated until the water yielded by the well remains clear when the well is
surged and backwashed by this technique.
108
-------
DEVELOPMENT AIDS
52.000-010-000. Washing with Water. Clean, clear water shall be
circulated to remove sediment from the well. A pump of sufficient size
shall be utilized for the washing process which will agitate the formation
for the purpose of preventing bridging of the sand particles and removing
a large portion of the finer material. The use of any chemicals, if pay is
to be received, must be approved by the OWNER or PROJECT REPRE-
SENTATIVE.
52.000-020-000. Washing.with Chemicals. Where applicable and
required, mud dispersing agents (such as glassy phosphate), acids for
washing limestone, and other chemicals applicable to standard procedures
may be used in accordance with the approval or direction of the OWNER
or his representative.
SAND CONTENT TESTING
52.000-001-000. Sand Content Testing. The sand content shall
be determined by averaging the results of 5 samples collected at the fol-
lowing times during the final pumping test: (1) 15 minutes after start
of the test; (2) after ^th of the total planned test time has elapsed; (3)
after % of the time has elapsed; (4) after %ths of the time has elapsed;
and (5) near the end of the pumping test.
The minimum volume of water sample collected for testing for sand
content shall be the test rate of flow in gpm multiplied by 0.05, with the
exception that the maximum volume required for wells test pumped at
more than 1000 gpm shall be 50 gallons (U.S.) and the minimum re-
quired for wells tested at less than 20 gpm shall be 5 gallons (U.S.).
Sand content shall be determined in the following manner. When the
circular orifice meter is used to measure flow rate, the sample shall be
withdrawn from a manometer connection. When other devices are used
for measuring flow rate on wells of a lower production rate, a sample may
be collected directly from the full and open discharge. The sample shall
be allowed to settle not less than 10 minutes before the liquid is decanted.
The sand content in ppm is read directly via such devices as that illus-
trated in the Preamble to this Article.
SAND CONTENT LIMITS
152.000-000-100. Well development shall continue until ppm
sand content is achieved as measured according to Article 52.000—001-
000 or until ordered stopped by the OWNER or his representative.
52.000—000-200. Wells supplying water for flood-type irrigation and
where the nature of the water-bearing formations and the overlying strata
are such that pumping the following amount of sand will not seriously
shorten the useful life of the well: Limit—15 ppm.
52.000—000—300. Wells supplying water to sprinkler irrigation sys-
tems, industrial evaporative cooling systems, and other uses where a moder-
ate amount of sand is not especially harmful: Limit—10 ppm.
109
-------
52.000—000—400. Wells supplying water to homes, institutions, munici-
palities, and industries other than those mentioned in Articles 52.000—000—
300 or 52.000-000-500: Limit—5 ppm.
52.000—000—500. Wells supplying water to be used directly in contact
with or in the processing of, food and beverages: Limit—1 ppm.
RECORD OF MEASUREMENT
52.000-000-010. Recording Measurements. A record shall be made
showing time, type of operation, specific capacity during pumping, pump-
ing rate and the sand content measured and recorded. These records shall
be submitted to the OWNER or his representative.
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR WELL DEVELOPMENT
52.000-000-001. Method of Payment.
Option A (Lump Sum): All of the work performed under this Article
(52) shall be paid for as a lump sum.
Option B (Time and Materials): All the work performed under this
Article (52) shall be paid for on the basis of the price bid for well con-
struction equipment per hour plus materials at cost plus per cent of add-on
bid.
Option C (Unit Price): All of the following work performed under this
Article (52) shall be paid for at the unit price bid per hour for well con-
struction equipment plus the cost of any materials and/or subcontracted
services at the invoice price plus per cent of add-on bid:
a. Well Development Unit Price/Hour
b. Chemicals Unit Price/Bag
Article 53
Well Testing For Performance
PREAMBLE
Data obtained from pumping tests, which are in fact the reasons for
testing, will provide information necessary to determine the capacity of
the well, aquifer characteristics, well efficiency, pumping rates, pump in-
stallation depth settings and other factors which will be of value in the
long term operation and maintenance of the well. The type of tests chosen
at any time are dependent upon the intended use of the well and the costs.
The information obtained can provide data for aquifer analysis as well as
for well construction. In selecting the type of pumping tests to be used,
the "pit-falls" as well as the benefits must be known and considered. Per-
formance test requirements should be consistent with the dimensions of the
well, the capacity of the well, and the rate at which it will be pumped
when placed in service. Care must be taken to avoid excessive pumping
rates with respect to both the productivity of the aquifer and the require-
ments of the user. Lastly, but probably most important, the tester should
not have preconceived opinions on what the well/aquifer system will yield.
110
-------
Design of the well should be based on facts derived from careful analysis
of data from properly conducted tests.
Depending on the size and intended use of the well, initial testing for
performance may range from a simple bailing test of relatively short
duration to a completely instrumented test involving "step," "continuous"
and "variable rate" testing lasting 72 hours or longer. For small installa-
tions the CONTRACTOR usually has sole responsibility for the testing,
while for larger wells his responsibility may be limited to the continuous
uniform operation of the equipment, changing the rates of discharge, and
measuring discharge and drawdown as directed by the OWNER or his
representative. Regardless of the responsibility involved, certain basic
practices should be followed in making any well test.
After development is completed and the test is scheduled by the OWNER,
a test pump capable of pumping approximately 150 percent of the de-
sired yield is installed in the well. The CONTRACTOR then makes the
test at the specified rate and duration. Test measurements are to be taken
in the manner specified and at the required time intervals. The test should
not be started until the static level has recovered after development has
been completed. Discharge should be accurately measured and maintained
within 5 percent of the testing rate during pumping tests. For bailing
tests the procedure should be as uniform as possible.
Extreme care must be taken to measure water levels before, during and
after performance testing. For proper interpretation of measurements
made during pumping or recovery, a static or non-pumping water level
trend must be established. This is done by making periodic measurements
of the static water level in the well for a period of time at least equal to
the duration of the proposed test and prior to its start. Water levels should
be measured with a steel tape, by flagging the bailer line, by reading
pressure on an air line, or with an electric sounder (preferably used
through a %-inch or larger conduit). Recovery readings of water level in
the well are started immediately upon shutdown of the test-pump and
taken at specified time intervals thereafter.
The amount and rate of drawdown and recovery of the water level with
time, are the most critical items of data needed to evaluate the initial
efficiency of the well and the hydraulic characteristics of the aquifer.
With small-capacity wells which will operate intermittently or irregular-
ly, testing should continue until an apparent stability of bailing or pump-
ing level is achieved. Ideally, with large-capacity wells, pumping should
be continued at a uniform rate of discharge until the cone of influence
reflects any boundary condition which could affect future performance of
the well. This probably will not exceed 24 hours for an artesian well, and
72 hours for a water table well. All test pumping data, including recovery
data should be submitted to the OWNER or his representative upon com-
pletion of the test.
Ill
-------
Comprehensive aquifer tests, require a minimum of one or two obser-
vation wells, depending on the purpose of the test results or the well. In
typical situations observation wells may be from 100 to 300 feet from the
production well and about the same depth. Observation wells may be
smaller in diameter, however. For testing relatively thick artesian aquifers,
observation well distance of 300 to 700 feet from the pumped well are not
uncommon.
TYPES OF PUMPING TEST PERFORMED
53.100-000-000. Bailing Test Method. The CONTRACTOR shall
measure the static level of the water in the well. Next he shall select a
bailer of known volume only slightly smaller than the casing and calculate
or measure and record its volume. He shall then bail the well until he
can no longer lower the water level; he shall then lower the bailer until
it hits the water (a fast falling bailer makes an audible sound when it
hits the surface), and mark the bailing line with paint at a point level
with the top of the casing when the bottom of the bailer is just touching the
water. A second mark is then made one bailer length above the first.
Rhythmically bailing, he shall lower the line precisely to the second mark
on the cable each time, noting the elapsed time per round trip. He shall
make sure the bailer is full each time it emerges from the well. If the bailer
is not full, it is not to be lowered deeper; however, the rate of bailing is
to be slowed until the bailer comes out full each time. The bailing rate, in
gallons per minute, equals the volume (gal) of the bailer divided by the
time (min) per round trip.
On occasion there may be less depth of water in the well then the length
of the bailer. In such instances it is manifestly impossible to bring the
bailer out full on each trip or to lower it below a certain point. Instead,
the CONTRACTOR shall measure the amount of water in the bailer and
relate it to a timed interval of 1 minute for each time the bailer leaves
the bottom of the well.
53.200-000-000. Air Blow Test Method. The well shall be tested for
30 minutes by introducing air in sufficient quantity to blow the water out
of the well. The discharge of the air shall be at the bottom of the hole. A
deflector shall be placed at the top of the well to deflect the water down-
ward outside the well. A dike shall be constructed around the well to con-
tain the deflected water, and a discharge pipe shall be placed near the
top of this dike and the water allowed to discharge through it. A con-
tainer of known volume shall be used to collect water from this discharge
for a measured period of time and the rate (gpm) shall be calculated
from this information and recorded.
53.300-000-000. Air Lift Test Method. The well shall be tested by
the air-lift method. The velocity in the eductor pipe shall be from 1,000
to 2,000 feet per minute. The air should be as finely divided as possible
112
-------
as it is introduced into the water. A series of upward-pointing jets shall
be placed in the air line.
The submergence of the pipe shall be 60 percent. Submergence is the
length of the eductor pipe from its open lower end to the pumping level
as related to the total length of the eductor pipe.
Drawdown in a well in which an air-lift pump is working shall be
measured between the casing and the educator pipe by any of the con-
ventional methods. A deflector shall be placed at the top of the well to
deflect the water downward outside the well. A dike shall be constructed
around the well to retain the water. A discharge pipe shall be placed near
the top of this dike and the water allowed to discharge through it. A con-
tainer of known quantity shall be used to collect water from this dis-
charge for a measured period of time and the rate (gpm) shall be cal-
culated from this information and recorded.
t53.400-000-000. Variable Rate Method. The CONTRACTOR
shall furnish, install and remove the necessary measuring instruments and
pumping equipment capable of pumping to the required place of dis-
charge a minimum of _ gpm (Ips) with a pumping level of -
feet (meters), and with satisfactory throttling devices, so that the dis-
charge may be reduced to _ gpm (Ips) . The pumping unit shall be
complete with prime mover of ample power, controls and appurtenances,
and shall be capable of being operated without interruption for a period
of - hours .The pump shall be set at the depth of the lowest produc-
ing zone and pumped at the design rate until the pump breaks suction. If
the pump does not break suction for a period of 24 hours, the test shall be
completed as a continuous rate test. If the pump breaks suction, the rate
shall be slowly decreased until the pumping level stabilizes approximately
2 feet (0.6 m) above the pumping intake for a period of not less than 5 min-
utes. The pumping rate shall then be decreased 5 percent and the well
pumped at this rate until the pumping level stabilizes for 1 hour. The dis-
charge rate and drawdown thus established shall then be maintained for
at least 4 hours. This pumping rate shall be considered the available pro-
duction rate of the well, and the observed pumping level during the test
shall be considered the production pump's pumping level.
t53.500-000-000. Constant Rate Method. The CONTRACTOR shall
furnish, install and remove the necessary measuring instruments and pump-
ing equipment capable of pumping to the required point of discharge a
minimum of _ _ gpm ( _ Ips), with a pumping level of
- feet ( _ m) , and with satisfactory throttling devices, so
that the discharge may be reduced to _ gPm ( _ IPS) •
pumping unit shall be complete with an ample power source, controls and
appurtenances and shall be capable of being operated without interruption
for a period of _ hours.
The well shall be pumped at a discharge rate of _ gpm
( _ Ips) for a minimum of _ hours. The test pump shall
113
-------
have its intake at least 5 feet (1.5 m) below the estimated lowest
pumping level, and shall have sufficient power and capacity to achieve the
designated discharge rate. Discharge shall be measured with an accurate
totalizing meter and stopwatch, a circular orifice meter, or a Venturi
meter, any of which are subject to approval by the OWNER or his rep-
resentative. Discharge shall be maintained within plus or minus 5
percent of the designated rate by means of a gate valve or throttling de-
vice. Discharge shall be checked and adjusted, if necessary, every 10 min-
utes during the first hour of pumping and at 30-minute intervals thereafter.
The discharge and time of measurement shall be recorded each time it is
checked and a note made of any adjustments. The static or non-pumping
water level trend shall be established prior to the start of the test. Draw-
down shall be measured according to the following schedule: 0 to 10
minutes—every minute; 10 to 45 minutes—every 5 minutes; 45 to 90 min-
utes—every 15 minutes; 90 to 180 minutes—each half hour; 180 minutes
to the end of the test—each hour. Should the measurements not be made
exactly at the times specified, the actual time of each measurement shall
be recorded. On completion of pumping, recovery measurements shall be
made according to the above drawdown schedule.
t53.600-000-000. Step-Continuous Composite Method. The CON-
TRACTOR shall furnish, install and remove the necessary measuring in-
struments and pumping equipment capable of pumping to the required
point of discharge a minimum of gpm ( Ips), with the pump-
ing level of feet ( m), and with satisfactory throttling
devices, so that the discharge may be reduced to gpm (
Ips). The pumping unit shall be complete with an ample power source,
controls and appurtenances and shall be capable of being operated without
interruption for a period of hours.
Prior to starting the pump, water level measurements shall be made at
least hourly, for a minimum of eight hours, in the production well and all
observation wells, and these measurements shall be recorded on the same
note sheets to be used during the pumping test. The well shall be "step"
tested at rates of approximately %, %, 1 and l^/o times the design capacity
of gPm ( lps)- The complete test is estimated to
require approximately hours. The CONTRACTOR shall operate
the pump and change the discharge as directed by the OWNER. Dis-
charge of the pump shall be controlled by a gate valve, if electric
driven, and both gate valve and engine throttle if engine driven.
The discharge shall be controlled and maintained at approximately the
desired discharge for each step with an accuracy of plus or minus 5 per-
cent. Pump discharge shall be measured with a totalizing meter and stop-
watch, circular orifice meter, or Venturi meter as approved by the
OWNER. A % inch (1.27 cm) nominal diameter or larger pipe shall be
installed from a point 2 feet (0.6 m) above the pump intake to the well
head. The top of the pipe shall be readily accessible to insert, remove, and
114
-------
read the depth to water measurements on a 2-wire electric sonde, which
shall be used to measure the static water level and drawdown in the well.
A clearly marked convenient reference point shall be set at the top of the
pipe. The sonde shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR.
After recovery from the step test is complete, a constant rate test shall
be conducted by pumping the well at the design rate or at maximum yield
for a period of not less than 24 hours and until the pumping level remains
constant for at least 4 hours, or until the OWNER or his representa-
tive terminates the test.
Measurements of pumping rate and water level shall be made every 1
minute for the first 10 minutes of the test, every 2 minutes for the next
10 minutes, every 5 minutes for the next 40 minutes, every 15 minutes for
the next hour, every 30 minutes for the next 3 hours, and hourly for the
remainder of the pumping period. Recovery water-level measurements shall
be made with the same frequency until sufficient data have been collected
to extrapolate the full recovery of the well or until the OWNER requires
no further data.
ABORTED TESTS
53.010—000—000. Aborted Test. Whenever continuous pumping at
a uniform rate has been specified, failure of pump operation for a period
greater than one per cent of the elapsed pumping time shall require
suspension of the test until the water level in the pumped well has recov-
ered to its original level. For the purposes of this Article, recovery shall
be considered "complete" after the well has been allowed to rest for a
period at least equal to the elapsed pumping time of the aborted test—
except that if any three successive water level measurements spaced at least
20 minutes apart show no further rise in the water level in the pumped
well, the test may be resumed immediately. The (Engineer, Owner's Repre-
sentative) shall be the sole judge as to whether this latter condition exists.
LOCATION OF DISCHARGE
fSS.OOl-OOO-OOO. Discharge Water. Discharged water shall be con-
ducted from the pump to the nearest surface-water body, storm sewer, or
ditch, as approved by the OWNER or his representative or at least
a distance of feet ( m) through approved piping or lined
ditches to prevent recirculation of discharged water into the aquifer being
tested. It is imperative to insure that no damage by flooding or erosion is
caused to the chosen drainage structure or disposal site.
RECORD OF PUMPING TESTS
53.000-100-000. Records. The CONTRACTOR shall keep accurate
records of the pumping test and furnish copies of all records to the
OWNER or his representative upon completion of the test. The records
shall also be available to the OWNER or his representative for in-
spection at any time during the test. For each well used in the test,
115
-------
the records shall include physical data describing the construction features
such as, but not limited to: well depth and diameter, complete screen de-
scription, length, and setting; a description of the measuring point and
its measured height above land surface and/or mean sea level; the methods
used in measuring water levels and pumping rates. An accurate descrip-
tion or sketch map of the well locations with identifying names or numbers
and distances between wells or from bodies of water shall be provided on
each set of records. Records of measurements shall include the date of the
test, the clock time and elapsed pumping time of each measurement, the
depth to water below the measuring point, the pumping rate at the time
of measurement, and any pertinent comments on conditions that may affect
the measurements. Frequency of water-level measurements before, during,
and after pumping shall be as specified by the OWNER or his representa-
tive.
MEASUREMENT OF WATER LEVELS
53.000-010-000. Bailer Line Method. Bailing line shall be marked
and measured from the bottom of the bailer to a point which is even with
the top of the casing when the bailer encounters water. On the last run
of the bailer on a bailer test, this measurement will be recorded as the
"bailed down" level.
53.000-020-000. Contractor's Choice. The method of taking water
level measurements shall be at the discretion of the CONTRACTOR; how-
ever, accuracy to within plus or minus .05 feet (1.5 cm) must be attained.
Accuracy may be required under special conditions to within plus or minus
.01 feet (0.3 cm).
53.000-030-000. Air Line Method. A 1/4 inch (.64 cm) tube free
of air leaks shall be installed in the well with the test pump, terminating
5 feet (1.5 m) above the pump intake. The tube shall have an accurate
altitude gage and air valve attached to it at the surface. The vertical dis-
tance from the bottom of the air line to the center of the gage shall be re-
corded. The line shall then be charged with air under pressure of at least
1 pound per square inch (0.1 Kg/cm2) for each 2 feet (0,6 m) of air line
and until the gage will read no higher, and the water level in the well com-
puted by subtracting the altitude in feet registered on the gage from the
length of the air line. This method is not recommended for small draw-
downs due to its lack of precision.
f53.000-040-000. Steel Tape Method. Water levels less than 300
feet (90 m) deep may be measured by chalking a weighted steel tape,
lowering it a known distance into the well and determining the depth by
subtraction of the submerged part of the tape as indicated by the wetted
chalk mark. If the steel tape is to be lowered through a metal or plastic
tube, the tube must be of inches ( cm) in diameter and
its bottom must terminate approximately 2 feet (0.6 m) above the pump
intake.
116
-------
53.000-050-000. Electric Sounder Method. A i/2 inch (1.27 cm)
or larger diameter pipe shall be installed in the well from the surface to
2 feet (0.6 m) above the pump intake. The upper end of the pipe shall
be so arranged that an electric sounder and line may be easily inserted,
lowered, and read. Static water level, drawdown, and recovery measure-
ments shall be made through this pipe, which shall have a clearly marked
and readily accessible reference point at the top.
COLLECTION OF WATER SAMPLES
53.000-001-000. Water Samples and Analysis. See Article 55 of
these standards, "Water Samples and Analysis".
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR TESTING FOR PERFORMANCE
53.000-001-000. Method of Payment.
Option A (Lump Sum): All of the work performed under this Article
(53) shall be paid for as a lump sum.
Option B (Time and Materials): All of the work performed under this
Article (53) shall be paid for on the basis of the price bid for well con-
struction equipment per hour plus materials at cost plus per cent of add-in
bid.
Option C (Unit Price): All of the following work performed under this
Article (53) shall be paid for at the unit price bid per hour for well con-
struction equipment plus the cost of any materials and/or subcontracted
services at the invoice price plus percent of add-on bid:
a. Installation and Removal of Testing Equipment Lump Sum
b. Recovery Stand-by Time Unit Price/Hour
c. Discharge Pipe Unit Price/Foot
Article 54
Well Disinfection
PREAMBLE
General aspects of well disinfection for which standards should provide
clarification are:
A. Inspection for and removal of foreign matter is a necessary pre-
requisite to well disinfection.
B. The specific time in the overall well construction schedule at which
the disinfection is required.
C. The amount of disinfecting agent to be used and the contact time
required.
D. The establishment of equipment and work procedures required in
carrying out the disinfection.
Well cleaning is a necessary part of well construction. Contaminants in
the form of grease, oil, soil and other foreign substances can harbor and
protect bacteria from subsequent disinfection. Generally mechanical extrac-
117
-------
tion, swabbing and pumping have proved effective for most cleaning re-
quirements. Cleaning and disinfecting chemicals should only be employed
where responsible and competent authority has approved their use, the
amount to be used and the method to be employed.
Suggestion for periodic disinfection during construction, disinfection of
the well drilling equipment, and for adding granulated calcium hypo-
chlorite during artificial filter installation appear in the literature dealing
with well construction. The effectiveness of periodic disinfection is question-
able considering the conditions under which it likely would be carried out.
Experience with the disinfection of pipelines shows that clean conditions
are necessary for chlorination to be effective. Clean conditions necessary
for effective well disinfection may be inherent in the techniques used for
the construction of the well, as when a surge plunger and pumping are
used for development.
Well drilling equipment and tools should be kept clean and a conscien-
tious effort made to prevent the transporting of foreign material from one
well site to another. Water used for the drilling fluid should be clean and
free of organic material and/or minerals which would impair the qualities
of the drilling fluid. This does not preclude the use of approved commer-
cial organic drilling fluid additives.
Normal water well disinfection practice is to utilize a chlorine solution
prepared with either- calcium hypochlorite—powdered or tablet form—or
sodium hypochlorite in liquid form. The effectiveness of a chlorine solution
is generally misconstrued to be the theoretical amount of free chlorine in
the solution. Actually, the effectiveness of the solution is primarily related
to the amount of hypochlorous acid (HOG) present and not to the total
free chlorine, commonly referred to in regulations dealing with well
chlorination. Because the formation of HOC1 is retarded at higher pH
values, and standard chlorine compounds increase pH, a 100 ppm chlorine
solution—prepared with neutral (pH 7) water—may be a less effective
germicide than a 50 ppm solution prepared with water of lower pH. Effective-
ness is also related to the amount of contact time. With a contact time of
8 hours, or more, chlorine solutions of 50, 100 or 200 ppm apparently
provide adequate effectiveness against pathogenic organisms.
It should be noted here that appropriate compounds of iodine, bromine,
ozone or other disinfectants may be used in place of chlorine, with the
approval of state and local regulatory agencies.*
The following paragraphs represent special conditions rather than normal
disinfection practice:
A. Where the ground water has a low pH value caution should be
exercised with the use of chlorine as a disinfecting agent due to
the highly corrosive nature of a chlorine solution with a low pH
value.
* EPA considers chlorine and chlorine-releasing compounds to be the only practical
disinfectants for well disinfection.
118
-------
B. As noted previously, continuous or periodic disinfection during the
construction of a well may be desirable. In such instances care is
required to insure that disinfection not interfere with the work of
construction.
C. Interim chlorination with a solution of 5 to 10 ppm of free chlorine
is advisable when several days will elapse between well completion
and the carrying out of normal disinfection required by regulatory
agencies. While not normally acceptable for final disinfection by
most state regulatory agencies a chlorine dose of 5 to 10 ppm
should provide adequate protection where prolonged contact time—
days rather than hours—is assured. Where domestic wells are
complete weeks before permanent pumping equipment is installed
an interim disinfection with a 5 to 10 ppm concentration should
be carried out with the solution remaining in the well for the
entire interval between well completion and the time the per-
manent pump is installed.
Scheduling of disinfection should not pose a problem regardless of the
type of well involved. It should not be delayed pending the installation of
a permanent pump but should immediately follow completion of the well.
For public water supply wells or industrial wells a pumping test is usually
required. In such instances disinfection should be done upon installation of
the test pumping equipment. The chlorine is expelled from the well during
the test pumping.
It is of major importance in well disinfection to insure adequate dis-
tribution of the disinfecting agent in the well and also to that part of the
well above the static water level. Where disinfection with a dry chlorine
compound is necessary or permitted—without first preparing a liquid solu-
tion—appropriate means must be provided to achieve a relatively even
application of the compound to the bottom of the well screen and through-
out the well. Pellets or powdered chlorine compound must be used with a
mechanical carrier. Usually a solution is prepared prior to placement of
the disinfectant into the well.
Unless the solution is evenly distributed the disinfectant may move later-
ally rather than to the bottom of the well. An appropriate tremie device—
hose or pipe—should be employed to insure proper distribution of the dis-
infectant. Agitation through use of a bailer, surge block, or by intermittent
stopping and starting of a test pump, is recommended to force some of the
solution into the water bearing formation around the well. However, agita-
tion is not an alternative to adequate distribution of the concentrated
chlorine solution.
If a test pump is available during disinfection it provides a convenient
means for application of the disinfecting solution to the dry part of the
well. The discharge piping of either a test pump or permanent pump should
incorporate a tap and hose connection on the pump side of a valve in the
discharge piping, to facilitate application of the chlorine solution in the
119
-------
well to the dry part of the well through a hose. Intermittent pump oper-
ation for surging will not interfere with hose application of the solution
to dry parts of the well, and in keeping such parts wet for an adequate
period of time. When a pumped supply of dilute chlorine solution is not ,
available for this purpose, a separate tank and gravity system will be
needed.
Although partial disinfection of the well system may be done during
testing, a final disinfection must be the final act of well construction,
elimiating any chance of contamination.
SCHEDULING DISINFECTION
54.100-000-000. The CONTRACTOR shall provide for disinfection
as soon as construction of the well and cleaning procedures have been
completed. The CONTRACTOR shall carry out adequate cleaning pro-
cedures immediately preceding disinfection where evidence indicates that
normal well construction and development work have not adequately
cleaned the well. All oil, grease, soil, and other materials, which could
harbor and protect bacteria from disinfectants, shall be removed from the
well. Unless prior approval is obtained for employing chemicals or unusual
cleaning methods, the cleaning operation is to be carried out by pumping
and swabbing only. Where test pumping equipment is to be utilized, such
equipment shall be installed prior to or during disinfection and be
thoroughly hosed, scrubbed or otherwise cleaned of foreign material.
DISINFECTANTS
54.010—000—000. Chlorine or other compounds approved by state or
local regulatory agencies shall be used as disinfectants. The disinfectant
shall be delivered to the site of the work in original closed containers
bearing the original label indicating the percentage of available chlorine.
The disinfectant shall be recently purchased. Chlorine compounds in dry
form shall not be stored for more than one year and storage of liquid
compounds shall not exceed 60 days. During storage, disinfectants shall not
be exposed to the atmosphere or to direct sunlight. Unless superseded by
governmental regulation, the quantity of chlorine compounds used for dis-
infection shall be sufficient to produce a minimum of 50 ppm (parts per
million)""" available chlorine in solution when mixed with the total volume
of water in the well. A 50 ppm solution should result from utilizing quan-
tities of chlorine compounds, proportion to the depth of water, as listed in
Table 12.
INTERIM DISINFECTION
54.001—000—000. Should a delay of three days or more be anticipated
between the completion of the well and the regularly scheduled well disin-
* EPA recommends a minimum concentration of 100 ppm available chlorine tor
effective well disinfection.
120
-------
TABLE 12.—Chlorine Compound Required To Dose 100 Feet
of Water-Filled Well at 50 ppm**
1
Casing
diameter
(inches)
2
4
6
8
10
12
16
20
24
2
Volume
100 ft
(gals)
16.3
65.3
146.9
261.1
408.0
587.5
1,044.5
1,632.0
2,350.1
3
70% HTH
Perchloron, etc.
(dry weight)*
% oz
1 oz
2 oz
3 oz
4 oz
6 oz
10 oz
1 Ib
V/2 Ibs
4
Chlorine Compounds
25% Chloride
of Lime
(dry weight) *
]/& OZ
2 oz
4 oz
7 oz
11 oz
1 Ib
1% Ibs
3 Ibs
4 Ibs
5
5.25% Purex
Clorox, etc ,
(liquid measure)
2 oz
9 oz
20 oz
zys pts
3% pts
5 pts
1 gal
1% gals
2% gals
Note' Liquid sodium hypochlonte in a 12 percent solution is often sold for water and wastewater
treatment plant use, as a commercial bleach, or for use with swimming pools. Utilizing a solution
of this nature would call for a liquid measure equal to one-half the volumes presented in Column 5.
* Where a dry chemical is used, it should be mixed with water to form a chlorine solution prior
to placing it into the well.
** EPA recommends a minimum concentration of 100 ppm available chlorine. To obtain this
concentration, double the amounts indicated in Table 12.
faction an interim disinfection shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR.
The CONTRACTOR shall install an approved disinfecting agent in an
amount equal to 10 percent of the amount required for final disinfection.
For this purpose the disinfecting agent shall be furnished or prepared in
liquid form and placed in the well through a hose or tremie of sufficient
length to extend to the bottom of the well. The disinfecting agent shall
be applied through the hose, which is to be raised and lowered, to achieve
uniform distribution of the solution throughout the well.
DAILY OPERATIONS DISINFECTION
54.000-100-000. Daily chlorination of the well shall be carried out
by the CONTRACTOR during drilling operations. The CONTRACTOR
shall discuss with the OWNER the amount of disinfecting agent to be
used and its method of use in advance of initiating the work. Chlorine
compound dosages and method of utilization shall be satisfactory to the
OWNER in its entirety.
DISINFECTION PROCEDURE
54.000-010—000. Unless otherwise modified—due to problems involved
with the specific well or conflict with local, state or federal governmental
regulatory agency requirements—disinfection procedure shall include, but
not be limited to the following:
Provide reliable means for insuring that the disinfecting agent is uni-
formly applied throughout the entire water depth of the well without rely-
ing on subsequent mechanical or surging action for dispersing the dis-
infectant; the dispersion of the disinfectant shall be assisted by pouring
121
-------
into the well a volume of water equal to the volume of the screen, after
the disinfectant has been emplaced. This will cause the disinfectant to flow
out of the well into the area adjacent to the screen.
All accessible portions of the well above the water level shall be main-
tained in a damp condition with water containing the required concentra-
tion of disinfecting agent for a period of not less than 20 minutes. The
disinfecting agent shall be left in the well for a period of at least 12 hours.
After a 12 hour, or longer, contact period the well is to be pumped to
clear it of the disinfecting agent. The disposal point for the purged water
shall be as selected so as to minimize potential damage to aquatic life or
vegetation.
DISINFECTION OF WATER TABLE WELLS
54.000—001—000. Dry Chlorine Compounds. A doubly capped, per-
forated pipe container filled with the appropriate amount of a granular
chlorine compound for the well shall be moved up and down the entire
well bore until the material has dissolved.
f54.000-002-000. Stock Solution (I). A stock solution sufficient
to produce ppm of available chlorine shall be added to the well at
different intervals from top to bottom and then agitated to distribute it
evenly throughout the well.
f54.000-003-000. Stock Solution (II). A stock chlorine solution of
15,000 ppm shall be added to a continuous flow of water into the well to
produce a ppm concentration of available chlorine throughout the
well.
54.000-004-000. Prepared Solution. The chlorine solution of the
appropriate concentration to disinfect the well shall be prepared on the
surface in containers having an aggregate volume equal to at least twice
the volume of water in the well and then rapidly discharged into the well
so as to thoroughly flush that portion of the casing which is above the water
level.
DlSFECTION OF FLOWING ARTESIAN WELLS
54.000—000—100. Dry Chlorine Compounds. A doubly capped, per-
forated pipe container filled with a granular chlorine compound shall be
placed at a point on or below the top of the producing horizon. This process
shall be repeated as often as necessary to achieve and maintain the standard
50 ppm concentration for a period of not less than one hour.
54.000-000-200. Controlled Flow Disinfection. Flow shall be con-
trolled by either capping or by a suitable standpipe. In the event the well is
capped a stock chlorine solution shall be injected, under pressure, by means
of a droppipe to the bottom of the well. The cap shall be equipped with a
suitable one-inch valve. After the injection is complete air shall be injected
for agitation while simultaneously opening the valve in the cap permitting
the chlorine solution to be dispersed to the surface. The valve shall then be
122
-------
closed and the flow stopped. The chlorine concentration shall be maintained
at 50 ppm for six hours.
In the event flow can be controlled by a suitable standpipe the chlorine
treatment can be conducted as though the well was non-flowing.
54.000-000-300. Stock Solution. A stock chlorine solution shall be
applied for a period of not less than one hour at a point at or below the
top of the producing zone. The rate of application will be such that the
standard 50 ppm concentration is achieved and maintained during the
application period.
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR WELL DISINFECTION
54.000-000-010. Method of Payment.
Option A (Lump Sum): All of the work performed under this Article (54)
shall be paid for as a lump sum.
Option B (Time and Materials): All of the work performed under this
Article (54) shall be paid for on the basis of the price bid for well construc-
tion equipment per hour plus materials at cost plus percent of add-on bid.
Option C (Unit Price): All of the following work performed under this
Article (54) shall be paid for at the unit price bid per hour for well construc-
tion equipment plus the cost of any materials and/or subcontracted services
at the invoice price plus percent of add-on bid:
a. Well disinfection Unit Price/Hour
b. Chemicals Unit Price
Article 55
Water Samples and Analyses
PREAMBLE
To determine the quality of ground water which will be available from
each well and its suitability for intended uses, the water in all wells should
be sampled during or immediately following construction and development,
and appropriate field and laboratory analyses based on the intended uses
should be made.
Chemical Quality
Knowledge of the quality of water encountered as the well is being con-
structed is highly desirable, and in some instances imperative because such
knowledge can affect decisions regarding continued construction, selection
of materials, and modifications in construction or in the planned operation
of the completed well. Common examples of quality related problems are:
water zones to be excluded by casing or grouting; choice of casing material;
selective casing perforation; selection of screen materials; screen setting;
and the installation and operation of water conditioning equipment.
While the quality of the water pumped is of prime interest to the OWNER,
the importance of establishing the quality of water available for each aquifer
123
-------
penetrated is often overlooked. Water quality determinations should be
made as soon as possible after penetration of each new source.
In extensively developed areas, determination of quality may be simply
a matter of verifying what already has been learned of water quality from
nearby wells.
The usefulness of any water quality analysis depends on the collection of
a representative sample. The cost of laboratory analysis can be wasted if
sampling is done carelessly or by those without training or experience.
Sample Collection For Chemical Analyses
The method used to collect samples for chemical analyses depends in part
on the drilling method, the intended purpose and yield of the well, and the
information desired. The simplest procedure consists of lowering a container
into the well, allowing it to fill, and raising it to the surface. The bailer is
such a device. More sophisticated devices for collecting samples at pre-
selected depths have been developed. The so-called "thief" sampler and the
ball type sampler are the most used of these devices. By collecting samples at
selected depths, it is possible to obtain a quality "profile" of the well or
borehole. Sampling with a bailer is common to the cable tool method of
drilling, particularly where well yields are small.
For wells of larger yield, pumped samples may be required. In some
instances the interval to be sampled is segregated by sealing-off the rest of
the well, installing a screen in the interval and pumping, beginning at a low
rate and increasing the rate until mud and other materials which will affect
the chemical analysis are removed. The process could take 24 hours or more.
Usually, samples are collected from the discharge during test pumping or
after the production pump is installed.
Samples should be collected after the well has been pumped (or bailed)
long enough to remove standing water, mud and other foreign material,
including development and disinfectant chemicals, so as to insure that
ground water has entered the well and the sample is representative of the
water in the aquifer (s).
Quite often determination of quality must be made during the initial
stages of construction to help decide whether to proceed with the work.
Determinations may also be made to find out if water of undesirable quality
has been encountered so as to exclude it, or to adjust or finalize the design
of the well. This determination can best be made during the drilling and
sampling phases of the construction.
Bacteriological Quality
Testing for bacteriological quality is the final step in well completion. The
sample is collected from the pump discharge after the well has been disin-
fected and the chlorine removed by pumping.
It occasionally happens following "disinfection" of a well that became
heavily contaminated during construction, that a positive (bad) result is
124
-------
reported by the laboratory. This calls for disinfection and testing to be
repeated. Failure to obtain negative (good) results after a second disinfec-
tion is reason to question the disinfected materials and procedures used, the
sanitary protection of the well, or possibly the quality of the water in the
aquifer. If the well cannot be cleared of contamination, another source of
water should be developed or steps taken to provide continuous chlorination
of the water before use.
The delays, extra work and cost associated with having to repeat well
disinfection procedures are compelling arguments for using adequate quanti-
ties of disinfectant and doing a thorough job the first time.
Sample Collection for Bacteriological Analysis
Collection of samples for bacteriological examination must be done care-
fully to avoid contamination of the water, the bottle, or the cap. Preferably,
sample collecting should be done by specially trained persons; some agencies
refuse to accept water for analysis that has not been collected by authorized
persons. Technical assistance and advice can usually be obtained from local
or state health departments.
Samples for bacteriological analysis are usually collected from the pump
discharge after the production pump has been installed and all of the disin-
fectant pumped from the well. Special care must be taken to avoid contacting
the inside of the bottle or the cap with the fingers, and to avoid having the
water splash from the hands into the bottle.
Suitable sterilized bottles are available from the agency or laboratory
making the analysis.
Field Tests
Tests for chemical and physical quality of water, performed in the field,
can be very helpful in making preliminary decisions affecting construction
and in detecting the presence of certain substances that would otherwise be
lost in the time it takes for the sample to arrive at the laboratory. A few such
substances are: carbon dioxide gas, oxygen, and hydrogen sulfide gas.
Chemicals are usually added in the field to ensure the accuracy of iron and
manganese determinations when the samples are brought to the laboratory
for analysis.
Field tests for water quality are intended to supplement—not replace—
the laboratory determinations. Most of the analysis cannot be as accurately
performed in the field with portable equipment as in the laboratory.
Specific electrical conductance is one field test that provides an approxi-
mation of the mineral content of the water. Because the property of water
to conduct electricity depends on the amount and kinds of mineral salts
dissolved in the water, there is a direct correlation between the conductivity
of the sample (indicated on the meter) and the total mineral content (cal-
culated) . This same principle is sometimes applied in a different way when
an "electric log" has been run in the completed bore hole. Resistivity (the
reciprocal of conductivity) values and other data from the log can be used
125
-------
to determine in a general way the relative mineral content of the water in
the formations penetrated by the bore hole.
Accurate interpretation requires considerable experience and a knowledge
of aquifer characteristics.
Field determinations for the presence of bacteria are possible using the
membrane filter technique. Considerable care and skill are required, how-
ever, and the test is seldom run in the field unless there is urgent need to get
results quickly. Final judgment of the bacteriological quality of the water
should be based on tests made in approved laboratories.
Laboratory Tests
Laboratory tests should be performed by reputable laboratories, preferably
those certified by the state.
A great variety of materials may be found in the ground either naturally
or as a result of man's activities. Rather than analyze for all possible
substances (which would be costly and time consuming) only those which
are known to be of significance should be determined. It has become standard
practice to group constituents in logical combinations, for example, to form
the common minerals.
Selecting constituents for which analyses should be made involves con-
sideration of the intended use of the water, knowledge of nearby quality
conditions, familiarity with requirements of state and local regulatory
agencies, understanding of commonly accepted user criteria, and the exercise
of good judgment.
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSES
55.100-000-000. Bacterial. A sample of the water from the well
should be collected and analyzed for coliform organisms after all traces of
development and disinfectantc hemicals have been removed from the well. If
the laboratory analysis shows the water is not safe to use, disinfection and
analysis shall be repeated until negative (good) results are reported by the
laboratory, or until it is determined by the health department that disinfec-
tion of the well cannot overcome the problem.
ANALYSIS FOR SPECIFIC CONSTITUENTS
f55.010-000-000. Specific Constituent-Analysis. Analysis for the
following specific constituents shall be made: , , ,
, Listed below are selections that can be used to fill in
the blanks above.
Common Minerals: A laboratory analysis for common constituents, in-
cluding calcium, magnesium, carbonate and bicarbonate, iron, manganese,
sulfate, chloride, fluoride, and total dissolved solids shall be made of any
potential potable water source to assure that applicable drinking water
standards are met, or that suitable treatment of the water can be provided
for.
126
-------
Metals and compounds: arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cyanide,
lead, mercury, nitrate, selenium, zinc.
Radioactivity: gross alpha particle emitters and Radium 226.
Pesticides: chlordane, endrin, heptachlor, heptachlor epoxide, lindane,
methoxychlor, toxaphene, azodrin, dichlorvos, dimethoate, ethion, chloro-
phenoxyls, others.
ANALYSIS FOR SPECIFIC PURPOSES
fSS.OOl-OOO-OOO. Domestic Water Supply. The chemical analysis
shall include the following determinations:
1. Iron
2. Total hardness
3. Alkalinity
4. pH
5. Manganese
6. Nitrates (N03)
7. Specific Conductance
8. , ,
t55.002-000-000. Well and Treatment Facility Design. In order
to obtain planning data for well design, well maintenance, water treatment
considerations and future needs and references, water quality data shall be
obtained. The preferred procedure shall be field analysis with confirming
samples sent to an approved laboratory for confirmation. Chemical analysis
shall include the following:
1. Total dissolved solids
2. Total hardness
3. Total iron
4. Total manganese
5. Chloride
6. Total alkalinity
7. Nitrate
8. PH
9. Ryznar Stability Index
10. Carbon Dioxide
11. Hydrogen Sulfide Gas
12. Dissolved Oxygen
13. Fluoride
14. , ,
t55.003-000-000. Irrigation Water Supply. The chemical analysis
shall include the following determinations:
1. Boron
2. Calcium
3. Magnesium
4. Sodium
5. Potassium
127
-------
6. Carbon Dioxide
7. Bicarbonate
8. Sulfate
9. Nitrate
10. Total dissolved solids
11. Sodium adsorption ratio
12. , ,
t55.004-000-000. Industrial Water Supply. The chemical analysis
shall include the following determinations:
1. Total Dissolved Solids
2. Total Hardness
3. Iron
4. Manganese
5. Alkalinity
6. pH
7. Turbidity
8. Color
9. Silica
10. Stability Index
11. Saturation Index
12. Sulfates (S04)
13. Nitrates (NO.,)
14. Phosphates (PCX)
15. Carbon Dioxide C02
16. Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S)
17. , ,
55.005-000-000. Municipal Water Supply. If the well is for munici-
pal use, analyses shall be made for the constituents listed in the currently
applicable drinking water standards.
TYPES OF SAMPLES
55.000—100-000. Bacterial Sampling. A sample of water of at least
125 milliliters (equal to about !/4 of a pint) shall be collected for bac-
teriological analysis; i.e., primarily for the presence of coliform bacteria.
A sterile sample bottle, preferably one provided by the laboratory that will
make the determination, shall be used. It is extremely important that nothing
except the water to be analyzed come in contact with the inside of the bottle
or the cap; the water must not be allowed to flow over an object or the
hands into the bottle being filled. The sample bottle shall not be rinsed. The
water should be allowed to flow to waste for several minutes to clear the
service lines before the sample is taken. The sample shall be delivered to the
laboratory as soon as possible, and in no event more than 30 hours after its
collection. During delivery, the sample should be kept as cool as possible
(but not frozen).
128
-------
t55.000-200-000. Bacterial Sampling Plus Chemical Sampling.
A sample of water of at least 125 milliliters (equal to about l/4 of a pint)
shall be collected for bacteriological analysis; i.e., primarily for the presence
of coliform bacteria. A sterile sample bottle, preferably one provided by the
laboratory that will make the determination, shall be used. It is extremely
important that nothing except the water to be analyzed come in contact with
the inside of the bottle or the cap; the water must not be allowed to flow
over an object or the hands into the bottle being filled. The sample bottle
shall not be rinsed. The water should be allowed to flow to waste for several
minutes to clear the service lines before the sample is taken. The sample shall
be delivered to the laboratory as soon as possible, and in no event more
than 30 hours after collection. During delivery, the sample should be kept
as cool as possible (but not frozen).
A (1/2, 1, 2) gallon (1.89, 3.79, 7.58 liter) sample of water shall
be collected for chemical analysis. The water sample shall be collected in
a new, unused polyethylene "cubitainer," or in a glass container with
teflon-lined cap. The glass container shall have been chemically cleaned by
the laboratory that will make the analysis.
t55.000-300-000. Bacterial Sampling Plus Chemical Sampling
Plus Radiological Sampling. A sample of water of at least 125 millimeters
(equal to about 1A of a pint) shall be collected for bacteriological analysis;
i.e., primarily for the presence of coliform bacteria. A sterile sample bottle,
preferably one provided by the laboratory that will make the determination,
shall be used. It is extremely important that nothing except the water to be
analyzed come in contact with the inside of the bottle or the cap; the water
must not be allowed to flow over an object or the hands into the bottle being
filled. The sample bottle shall not be rinsed. The water should be allowed
to run for several minutes to clear the service lines before the sample is
taken. The sample shall be delivered to the laboratory as soon as possible,
and in no case more than 30 hours after collection. During delivery, the
sample should be kept as cool as possible (but not frozen).
A ('/a, 1, 2) gallon (1.89, 3.79, 7.58 liter) sample of water shall
be collected for chemical analysis. The water sample shall be collected in a
new, unused polyethylene "cubitainer," or in a glass container with teflon-
lined cap. The glass container shall have been chemically cleaned by the
laboratory that will make the analysis.
A (1/2 or 1) gallon (1.89, 3.79 liter) sample of water shall be
collected for examination for radioactivity. The sample shall be collected in
a new, unused polyethylene "cubitainer," or in a glass container with teflon-
lined cap. The glass container shall have been chemically cleaned by the
laboratory that will make the analysis.
t55.000-400-000. Chemical Sampling Only. A (l/2, 1, 2)
gallon (1.89, 3.79, 7.58 liter) sample of water shall be collected for chemical
analysis. The water sample shall be collected in a new, unused polyethylene
"cubitainer," or in a glass container with teflon-lined cap. The glass con-
129
-------
tamer shall have been chemically cleaned by the laboratory that will make
the analysis.
t55.000-500-000. Chemical Sampling Plus Radiological Samp-
ling. A (Y2, 1, 2) gallon (1.89, 3.79, 7.58 liter) sample of water
shall be collected for chemical analysis. The sample shall be collected in a
new, unused polyethylene "cubitainer," or in a glass container with teflon-
lined cap. The glass container shall have been chemically cleaned by the
laboratory that will make the analysis.
A (5/2 or 1) gallon (1.89 or 3.79 liter) sample of water shall
be collected for examination for radioactivity. The sample shall be collected
in a new, unused "cubitainer," or in a glass container with teflon-lined cap.
The glass container shall have been chemically cleaned by the laboratory
that will make the analysis.
t55.000-600-000. Radiological Sampling Only. A (i/2 or 1)
gallon (1.89 or 3.79 liter) sample of water shall be collected for examination
for radioactivity. The sample shall be collected in a new, unused "cubi-
tainer," or in a glass container with teflon-lined cap. The glass container
shall have been chemically cleaned by the laboratory that will make the
analysis.
COLLECTION METHODS
(Chemical and Radiological Anlyses)
55.000-010-000. Bailed Sample Method. A water sample shall be
obtained by bailing at the time the water bearing formation is encountered,
first removing as much as possible of the water which has entered from other
sources. The samples shall be taken at time periods specified by the OWNER.
f55.000-020-000. Discharge Sample Method. A water sample shall
be taken of the water discharged during development or test pumping after
the well has been pumped for (minutes, hours, days), and after
development chemicals have been removed and there is minimum visual
evidence of mud or fines (such as sand, etc.) in the water.
fSS.OOO—030—000. Pumped Sample: Composite. A water sample
shall be obtained by pumping from the elevation (s) designated by the
OWNER with a submersible pump, air pump, or other device. The intake
shall be set at the elevation (s) prescribed and the pump operated for
(minutes, hours, days). The sample shall not be taken until the water
being pumped is free of mud or other foreign matter.
55.000—040—000. Point Sample. A water sample shall be obtained by
use of a "thief" sampler, ball sampler or other similar device designed for
collecting water samples at predetermined depths. Waters foreign to the
depth or depths selected for sampling, and other extraneous matter, shall
be removed as completely as possible prior to sampling, by pumping or
bailing.
f55.000-050-000. Pumped Sample: Segregated (Drill Stem
Test Sample). A water sample shall be obtained by pumping from the
130
-------
formation (s) designated by the OWNER. The interval to be sampled shall
be segregated from the remainder of the well by inflatable packers or other
means. If necessary, the interval shall be screened so as to prevent the influx
of loose material. The sample shall not be taken until the water being
pumped is free of mud and other extraneous matter that might affect the
chemical analysis, or until the pump has been operated (minutes,
hours, days).
WELL HEAD TESTS
55.000-001-000. Temperature and pH Tests Only. The temper-
ature and pH of the water shall be taken immediately upon collection of
the water sample and recorded on the sample container and drillers log.
Tests shall be conducted according to procedures prescribed by the manu-
facturer of the test equipment employed, local health or water agencies, or
as set forth in standard publications dealing with this method of analysis.
55.000-002-000. Temperature and pH Tests Plus Gas Tests
The temperature and pH of the water shall be taken immediately upon
collection of the water sample and recorded on the sample container and
drillers log. Tests shall be conducted according to procedures prescribed by
the manufacturer of the test equipment employed, local health or water
agencies, or as set forth in standard publications dealing with this method
of analysis. Test for the presence of gases shall be made immediately follow-
ing the collection in accordance with procedures prescribed by the manu-
facturer of the test equipment.
55.000-003-000. Temperature and pH Tests Plus Specific Elec-
trical Conductance Test, The temperature and pH of the water shall be
taken immediately upon collection of the water sample and recorded on the
sample container and in the drillers log. Tests shall be conducted in
accordance with procedures prescribed by the manufacturer of the test
equipment employed, local health or water agencies, or as set forth in
standard publications dealing with this method of analysis. Specific elec-
trical conductance (conductivity) shall be determined following collec-
tion using a conductivity meter that has been recently calibrated. Tests
shall be conducted in accordance with procedures prescribed by the manu-
facturer of the test equipment.
55.000-004-000. Temperature and pH Tests Plus Specific Elec-
trical Conductance Test Plus Alkalinity and Turbidity Tests. The
temperature and pH of the water shall be taken immediately upon collection
of the water sample and recorded on the sample container and in the drillers
log. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with procedures prescribed by
the manufacturer of the test equipment employed, local health or water
agencies, or as set forth in standard publications dealing with this method
of analysis. Specific electrical conductance (conductivity) shall be deter-
mined following collection using a conductivity meter that has been recently
calibrated. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with procedures pre-
131
-------
scribed by the manufacturer of the test equipment. The alkalinity and
turbidity of the water shall be determined immediately upon the collection
of the sample and recorded on the sample container and in the drillers log.
Tests shall be conducted in accordance with the procedures prescribed Ly
the manufacturer of the equipment local health or water agencies, or as set
forth in standard publications dealing with this method of analysis.
55.000-005-000. Temperature and pH Tests Plus Gas Test Plus
Specific Electrical Conductance Test. The temperature and pH of the
water shall be taken immediately upon collection of the water sample and
recorded on the sample container and in the driller's log. Tests shall be
conducted in accordance with procedures prescribed by the manufacturer of
the test equipment employed, local health or water agencies, or as set forth
in standard publications dealing with this method of analysis. Tests for the
presence of gases shall be accomplished immediately following the collection.
Tests shall be accomplished in accordance with procedures prescribed by
the manufacturer of the test equipment. Specific electrical conductance
(conductivity) shall be determined following collection using a conductivity
meter that has been recently calibrated. Tests shall be conducted in accord-
ance with procedures prescribed by the manufacturer of the test equipment.
55.000-006-000. Temperature and pH Tests Plus Gas Test Plus
Specific Electrical Conductance Test Plus Alkalinity and Turbidity
Tests. The temperature and pH of the water shall be taken immediately upon
collection of the water sample and recorded on the sample container and in
the drillers log. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with procedures pre-
scribed by the manufacturer of the test equipment employed, local health
or water agencies, or as set forth in standard publications dealing with this
method of analysis. Tests for the presence of gases shall be accomplished
immediately following the collection. Tests shall be accomplished in accord-
ance with procedures prescribed by the manufacturer of the test equipment.
Specific electrical conductance (conductivity) shall be determined following
collection using a conductivity meter that has been recently calibrated.
Tests shall be conducted in accordance with procedures prescribed by the
manufacturer of the test equipment. The alkalinity and turbidity of the
water shall be determined immediately upon the collection of the sample and
recorded on the sample container and in the drillers log. Tests shall be con-
ducted in accordance with the procedures prescribed by the manufacturer
of the equipment, local health or water agencies, or as set forth in standard
publications dealing with this method of analysis.
STANDARDS OF TEST AND SAMPLES
55.000-000—100. Laboratory Requirements. Laboratory tests shall
consist of those specified by the regulations of local or state government or
as described herein for the proposed use of the water. In addition, such other
tests prescribed by the OWNER will be made. All laboratory tests shall be
performed by a laboratory approved by the OWNER or his agent. Analytical
132
-------
techniques and methods shall be as prescribed in Standard Methods for the
Examination of Water and Waste Water, a joint publication of the American
Public Health Association, American Water Works Association, and Water
Pollution Control Federation. All samples shall he appropriately identified
as to geographic location, date, time, method of collection, point of collec-
tion, water bearing formation (s), depth and diameter of well, water level
and yield, and shall include the name bf the sample collector, CON-
TRACTOR, driller and OWNER.
METHOD OF PAYMENT
FOR WATER SAMPLES AND ANALYSES
55.000-000-010. Method of Payment.
Option A (Lump Sum): All of the work performed under this Article
(55) shall be paid for as a lump sum.
Option B (Time and Materials): All of the work performed under this
Article (55) shall be paid for on the basis of the price bid for well construc-
tion equipment per hour plus materials at its cost plus per cent of add-on bid.
Option C (Unit Price): All of the following work performed under this
Article (55) shall be paid for at the unit price bid per hour for well con-
struction equipment plus the cost of any materials and/or subcontracted
services at the invoice price plus percent of add-on bid:
a. Water Analyses Unit Price/Test Series
Article 56
Permanent Well and Test Hole Abandonment
PREAMBLE
Unsealed abandoned wells constitute a hazard to public health, safety,
welfare, and to the preservation of the ground water resource. The sealing
of such wells presents a number of problems, the character of which depend^
upon the construction of the well, the geological formations encountered, and
the hydrologic conditions. To seal an abandoned water well properly, several
things must be accomplished: (1) elimination of a physical hazard; (2)
prevention of ground water contamination; (3) conservation of yield and
maintenance of hydrostatic head of aquifers; and (4) prevention of the
intermingling of desirable and undesirable waters.
The basic concept governing the proper sealing of abandoned wells is the
restoration, as far as feasible, of the geohydrologic conditions that existed
before the well was drilled and constructed, for an improperly abandoned
well might serve as an uncontrolled invasion point for contaminated and
polluted water. Any well that is to be permanently abandoned should be
completely filled in such a manner that vertical movement of water within
the well bore, including vertical movement of water within the annular space
surrounding the well casing, is effectively and permanently prevented and
the water is permanently confined to the specific zone in which it originally
133
-------
occurred. If all these objectives can be accomplished, all the rules for sealing
wells heretofore presented will be fulfilled.
To seal an abandoned well properly, the character of the ground water
must be considered. If the ground water occurs under unconfined or water-
table conditions, the chief problem is that of sealing the well with im-
permeable material so as to prevent the percolation of surface water through
the original well opening, or along the outside of the casing, to the water
table. If the ground water occurs under confined or artesian conditions, the.
sealing operation must confine the water to the aquifer in which it occurs—
thereby preventing loss of artesian pressure by circulation of water to the
surface, to a formation containing no water, or to one containing water
under a lower head than that in the aquifer which is to be sealed.
Preparation For Abandonment
Strong efforts should be made to remove all materials from a well which
may hinder its proper abandonment. This is especially important where
specified zones must be sealed.
If a screen has been installed in the well by telescoping, its recovery is
usually possible by installing a string of fishing casing from the top of the
well to a sand hitch placed close to the bottom of the screen. Following the
setting of the sand hitch, a lifting force, applied either by mechanical or
hydraulic jacks, or multiple pulling lines from the casing reel of the drilling
machine, will usually withdraw the screen from the well.
In recovering steel casings extending to the surface, the least expensive
and least hazardous method is to apply a lifting force to the casing by the
use of jacks, or with the drilling machine, or with the two in combination.
Still more effective is the use of a jarring head applied at the top of the
casing string and used in combination with lifting devices.
Maximum recovery is usually obtained by using a trip-type casing spear
actuated by a fishing cable tool string and used in combination with lifting
devices. The trip spear is usually limited in its use to recently drilled wells
or to those in which the casing is known to be in sound condition. The risk
of failure associated with the use of a casing spear increases with the age
of the well and the depth at which it is to be used.
It is always good practice to probe the well with a swage of the same
diameter as the spear prior to inserting the latter.
The order of descent into the casing for a trip spear string of tools is:
(1) trip spear; (2) fishing jars; (3) sinker bar or drill stem; (4>) rope
socket, which is attached to the drilling line. The swage would replace the
spear in the above string of tools.
Where a drive shoe is attached to the bottom of a casing string to be
extracted, it is often advantageous to separate the casing from the shoe. The
preferred method for cutting casing is by use of a casing cutter. Some states
do not permit the use of explosives inside the casing.
134
-------
Abandonment
Borehole Bridging
To reduce cost of unnecessary backfilling of long sections of borehole,
it is often desirable to establish a temporary bridge in the borehole upon
which a permanent cement-based bridge can be placed. No organic materials
should be used in either the temporary or permanent bridge—except that
specially manufactured devices such as cement plugging tools in which
neoprene rubber or plastics are used, are acceptable and these greatly
facilitate the work. Some of these devices permit establishing the permanent
bridge without first having to set a temporary one.
Abandonment of Flowing Artesian Wells
The flowing artesian well with improperly sealed casing and with water
escaping around the outside of the casing either to the surface or to another
formation presents a special problem. A necessary first step in bringing the
flow under control is to establish a permanent cement seal between the casing
and the point or points from which the water is escaping.
In order to place this seal effectively, the flow must be stopped and the
water level lowered in the well. This can be accomplished by several methods.
Some of these are: (1) pumping the problem well, thereby producing the
necessary drawdown; (2) pumping nearby wells, producing the same effect;
and (3) introducing high specific gravity fluids at the bottom of the borehole
and filling the hole with the fluid until all flow ceases. The method or
methods used will depend in part on the shut-in pressure of the well and the
depth to which the water level must be lowered.
The sealing of abandoned wells that have a large movement of water
between aquifers or to the surface requires special attention. The movement
of water may be sufficient to make the sealing with ordinary materials and
by the usual methods impractical. In such wells, large stone aggregates (not
more than 1/3 of the diameter of the hole) lead wool, steel shavings, a well
packer, or cast lead plug or bridge should be used to restrict the flow thereby
permitting the placement of appropriate sealing material. If preshaped or
precast plugs are used, they should be several times longer than the diameter
of the well to prevent tilting. The flow of artesian wells to be abandoned can
best be stopped with neat cement or sand-and-cement grout piped under
pressure or, in some instances, by the use of a suitable well packer or cast
lead plug placed at the bottom of the confining formation immediately over-
lying the artesian water-bearing zone.
In wells in which the hydrostatic head producing the flow is low and in
which there is no escape of water below ground, the movement of water
can be arrested by extending the well casing to an elevation above the
artesian pressure surface. This permits the placement of sealants and fill
materials, after which the casing may be cut off at or below ground level.
135
-------
Abandonment of Other Borings and Holes
Mineral exploration holes, solution or "in situ" mining wells, dewatering
wells, temporary service wells, construction water wells, process wells, and/or
other structures that affect the withdrawal from or quality of water in the
ground water reservoir, regardless of location or intended life of the struc-
ture or hole, should be abandoned as described herein for water supply
wells.
Functions of Seals
Three basic types of seals—distinguished by their functions—may be used
in a properly abandoned well. They are:
A. Permanent Bridge-Seal: The deepest cement seal to be placed in
the well, this seal serves two purposes: it forms a permanent bridge
below which considerable unfilled hole may remain and upon which
fill material may be safely deposited; and it seals upper aquifers
from any aquifer (s) which may exist below the point of sealing.
(See Figure 4)
B. Intermediate Seal: This seal is placed between water-bearing forma-
tions which have, or are believed to have, different static heads. Its
function is to prevent the interaquifer transfer of water. (See
Figure 5)
C. Seal at Uppermost Aquifer: This seal is placed immediately above
the uppermost aquifer penetrated by the bore hole. Its function is
to seal out water from the surface and from shallower formations.
In flowing artesian wells, it is designed to prevent the escape of
water to the surface, or to shallower formations. (See Figure 6)
Each abandonment effort should be considered an individual problem, and
methods and materials should be selected only after detailed study of both
construction and geohydrology. Whenever there is doubt about either the
construction or the geohydrology involved, the choices of materials and
procedures should be those affording the greatest probability for successful
sealing.
AQUIFER SEALING CRITERIA
56.100-000-000. Aquifer Sealing Criteria. Aquifers shall be filled
with disinfected, dimensionally stable materials, compacted mechanically if
necessary to avoid later settlement. (Cement, cement-and-sand, and concrete
do not require disinfection.)
Disinfection of aquifer fill materials shall be accomplished by using
chlorine compounds such as sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite.
Aquifer fill materials shall be clean (relatively free of clays and organic
materials) before placement in the well. Disinfection shall be accomplished
by dissolving sufficient chlorine compound to produce a calculated concen-
tration of at least 100 ppm available chlorine in double the volume of water
136
-------
Figui
PERMANENT
ire 4
BRIDGE SEALS
to
COMMERCIAL CEMENTING TOOL
WITH EXPANDABLE LINER
CEMENT SEAL BEING PLACED
(NOT TO SCALE)
BRIDGE SET WITH COMMERCIAL PLUGGING TOOL
GRAVEL TOPPED WITH 2 FEET
OF SAND FORM A "BRIDGE-
SUPPORT FOR THE PERMANENT
CEMENT SEAL
SPIDER--MADE FROM PIPE-
JAMMED INTO PLACE
(NOT TO SCALE)
MECHANICAL PLUG AND CEMENT BRIDGE
EXPEDIENT BRIDGE AND CEMENT SEAL
-------
Figure 5
INTERMEDIATE SEALS
SAND AQUIFER
/~^^
WELL CASING OR LINER
^
'
EXTENSION OF FILTER PACK —
IMPERMEABLE
MATERIALS
~~
•• '.v.-.- • :
° SAND AND GRAVEL o.
O
* ' » "° O «
0 AQUIFER * 0
o • '
O e
o • • . • '•/•>!
.
o 0 ° 0 ." °f
(NOT TO SCALE) U
INTERMEDIATE
!i i
W
''«.)
•it
'*.•}
?»/v
v-»
».°,
:;»
$
f^v
•;•:
A
y
f^
^
T»
°i«
:• .-*
v
r
ill fi
SEALI
!••••" •
s • ' - • - '
l^
\
\ — . ..
;
|"
\
c
\ j. NEAT CEMENT •
S CASING RIPPED AT LEAST 1 OFT. <3M )
\ \
jj [
£
"! J
; » » * o . »
( " • ' 0 o
; a, — - DISINFECTED SAND ANDG RAVEL . °
ra t> Q o.» -o
* °
< ' O ' o • . tf
i* /•••.-• * •
0
• ft j — SLOTTED PIPE OR SCREEN 0
V '- ' • ' J ' •• . '
< * ' 0 . „ •
* ' " » o
9 0 o ' o o . &
y
N LINED HOLE
138
-------
Figure 6
UPPERMOST AQUIFER
CO
VO
ORIGINAL CEMENT SEAL
SANDS AND CLAYS
AT LEAST .10FT <3M> OF CASING
RIPPED FOR CEMENT SEAL
.- CASING CUT OFF, UPPER
/ SECTION REMOVED
TIGHT LIMESTONE,
TIGHT SANDSTONE
OR SHALE
(IMPERMEABLE)
AT LEAST 10 FT. (3M ) OF SAND-AND-
ORGINAL CEMENT SEAL
i— 3 FT (1M ) OF SAND AND GRAVEL
SAND AND GRAVEL FILL
CRUSHED LIMESTONE OR ROCK
BACKFILL, COMPACTED
UPPERMOST AQUIFER SEALS IN WELL ABANDONMENT
-------
in the well. The fill material shall be placed in the well after the water in
the well has been so treated.
PERMANENT BRIDGES
56.010-000-000. Permanent Bridges. Permanent bridges may be
used to avoid having to fill very deep holes below the deepest point at which
a permanent seal is required. Permanent bridges shall be composed only of
cement or cement-bearing minerals. The cement shall be allowed to harden
for at least 24 hours, if Type I cement is used, or for at least 12 hours if
Type III (high early strength) cement is used, before backfilling is con-
tinued. Temporary bridges used to provide a base for the permanent bridge
ehall consist only of inorganic materials—except that patented devices con-
taining expandable neoprene, plastic, and other elastomers, and specifically
designed for use in well construction are acceptable.
PLACEMENT OF GROUT
56.001—000—000. Placement Operations. Concrete, sand-and-cement
grout, or cement grout used as a sealing material in abandonment opera-
tions shall be introduced at the bottom of the well or interval to be sealed
(or filled) and placed progressively upward to the top of the well. All such
sealing materials shall be placed by the use of grout pipe, tremie, cement
bucket or dump bailer, in such a way as to avoid segregation or dilution
of the sealing materials. Dumping grout material from the top shall not be
permitted.
Seals intended to prevent vertical movement of water in the well or bore
hole shall be composed of cement, sand-and-cement, or concrete—except
that where such seals must be placed within casing or liners, only neat
cement grout may be used. The cement-water ratio shall be that specified in
Article 48.100-000-000. Cement seals shall be placed by means of pumping
through drop pipe or by use of a dump-bailer, with placement beginning at
the bottom and continuing upward. The minimum cement seal length,
wherever dimensions permit, shall be 10 feet.
56.002-000-000. Intermediate Seals. Intermediate seals of cement,
sand-and-cement, or concrete shall be placed in impermeable strata between
aquifers which are identifiable as, or are suspected of being, hydraulically
separated under natural, undisturbed conditions. Once the required cement
seal has been installed, the remainder of the impermeable zone or non-
producing zone between aquifers shall be filled with sand, sand and gravel,
or cement-bearing mineral material.
56.003-000-000. Seal at Uppermost Aquifer. A cement, sand-and
cement, or concrete seal shall be installed in the least permeable zone im-
mediately above the uppermost water-producing zone. Such seals shall be
placed only in quiescent (non-flowing) water. (See Preamble (56) for
instructions on how to seal flowing wells.
140
-------
56.004-000-000. Seals Placed Within Casing, Liners, Filters, etc.
Seal which must be placed in casing, liners, or filters require special atten-
tion. The material between the well and the face of the bore hole shall be
thoroughly perforated, ripped, or otherwise disintegrated as the necessary
first step. Neat cement only, or neat cement with a maximum of 5 percent by
weight of commercially processed bentonite clay, shall be used as the seal.
Either of two methods may be used.
1. The calculated amount of grout required to fill the well interval
plus the annular space outside the lining shall be placed within the
space to be cemented, running the cement through a special cement-
ing packer manufactured for this purpose and installed immediately
above the perforated or ripped zone. The cement shall be injected
at a pressure calculated to be at least 50 psi greater than the normal
hydrostatic pressure within the well at the point of injection.
2. The calculated amount of cement grout required to fill the casing
interval plus the annular space outside the lining, plus sufficient
cement grout to fill an additional 10 feet of the lining, shall be
introduced at the bottom of the interval to be cemented.
PLACEMENT OF FILL
56.000—100—000. Non-Producing Zones. Non-producing zones above
the aquifer shall be filled with stable materials such as sand, sand-and-
gravel, cement, cement-and-sand, or concrete. Non-producing zones above
the uppermost aquifer seal shall be filled with materials less permeable than
the surrounding undisturbed formations. The uppermost 5 feet of the bore
hole (at land surface) shall be filled with a material appropriate to the
intended use of the land.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
56.000—010—000. Pre-existing Contamination. An abandoned well
which has already been affected by salt water intrusion or any other con-
taminants shall be considered a special case, and the method of filling and
sealing such wells shall be subject to individual review and written approval
by the regulatory agency involved.
In the sealing of a double or multiple cased well, the CONTRACTOR
shall submit a drawing thereof with a description of the proposed procedure
and materials to be used, for prior approval by the regulatory agency
involved.
Mineral exploration holes, solution or "in situ" mining wells, dewatering
wells, temporary service wells, construction water wells, process wells, and/or
other structures which affect the withdrawal or quality of ground water, or
the elevation of the water table, regardless of location or intended length
of life of the structure, shall be abandoned according to standards and mini-
mums as described herein for water supply wells.
141
-------
WELL ABANDONMENT RECORDS
56.000-001-000. Recording Location of Abandoned Well or
Bore Hole, Before equipment is removed from the site, the exact location
of the abandoned well or hole shall be determined and recorded, "tying in"
the location with permanent reference points, or as prescribed by the state
or local regulatory agency. AH information relative to the abandonment
procedures and the location of the abandoned well shall be prepared and
assembled as prescribed by the state or local regulatory agency, with copies
supplied to the respective agency and the owner of the land.
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR ABANDONMENT
56.000-000-100. Method of Payment.
Option A (Lump Sum): All of the work performed under this Article
(56) shall be paid for as a lump sum.
Option B (Time and Materials): All of the work performed under this
Article (56) shall be paid for on the basis of the price bid for well con-
struction equipment per hour plus materials at cost plus percent of add-on
bid.
Option C (Unit Price): All of the following work performed under this
Article (56) shall be paid for at the unit price bid per hour for well con-
struction equipment plus the cost of any materials and/or subcontracted
services at the invoice price plus percent of add-on bid:
Well Abandonment Unit Price/Foot
142
-------
Appendix A
Sample Notice to Bidders
1. Sealed bid, addressed to_
(Agency)
will be received at the office at —
(address)
until , and then publicly
(time) (date)
opened and read for furnishing all plant, labor material and equipment
and performing all work required for the construction of:
for , ,
(Name) (County) (State)
hereinafter called Owner.
2. Bids shall be submitted in sealed envelopes upon the blank form of
proposal furnished. Sealed envelopes shall be marked in the upper left hand
corner as follows:
Sealed Bid
Bid for
To be Opened.
(Time)
(Date)
3. All proposals shall be accompanied by a cashier's or certified check
or bid bond upon a national or state bank or surety company in the
amount % of the total amount for the base bid payable to
, as a guarantee that the
(Owner)
bidder will enter into a contract and execute performance bond within
( ) days after notice of award and that his bid will
(No.)
not be withdrawn within ( ) days
(No.)
after the date of opening of bids without the consent of the Owner. Bids
without check will not be considered.
4. All bid securities will be returned to the respective bidders within
_ ( ) days after bids are opened, except those which
(No.)
the Owner elects to hold until the successful bidder has executed the con-
tract and furnished the required bonds. Thereafter all remaining securities,
143
-------
including security of the successful bidder, will be returned within
(No.)
( ) days.
5. The successful bidder must furnish both a performance bond and a
payment bond upon approved standard form in the amount of %
of the contract price from an approved surety company licensed by the
state of , or acceptable, according to the
latest list of companies holding certificates of authority from the Secretary
of the Treasury of the United States, or other surety or sureties acceptable
to the Owner.
6. The right is reserved, as the interest of the Owner may require to
reject any and all bids, and to waive any informality in bids received.
7. Prospective bidders and suppliers may obtain specifications and
bidding documents from the office of
(Agency)
on deposit of: —
(Price)
per set, which sum so deposited will be refunded to bidders provided all
documents are returned in good condition to the office from which they
were issued, not later than ( ) days after the time bids
(No.)
are received. Drawings and specifications may be examined at the
(Location)
8. Bidders should carefully examine the plans, specifications and other
documents, visit the site of the work, and fully inform themselves as to all
conditions and matters which can in any way affect the work or the cost
thereof. Should a bidder find discrepancies in, or omission from the plans,
specifications, or other documents, or should he be in doubt as to their
meaning, he should at once notify the Owner and obtain clarification prior
to submitting any bid.
9. Addenda to the specifications and revised drawings issued to bidders
prior to the receipt of bids shall be considered part of the contract docu-
ments. Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of addenda and revised drawings
on the proposal form.
144
-------
Appendix B
Sample Proposal
For furnishing all Plant, Labor, Equipment and Materials and Perform-
ing all Operations necessary for the construction of
in
(Project) (Location)
(Address of Owner or Owner's Representative)
Gentlemen:
The undersigned, as Bidder, declares that he has carefully examined the
Notice to Bidders, Specifications, and the drawings herein referred to for
a for the
(Project) (Agency)
and has carefully examined the locations, conditions, and classes of mate-
rial of the proposed work, and agrees that he will provide all the necessary
machinery, apparatus, tools, and other means of construction, and will do
all the work and furnish all materials called for in the contract and specifi-
cations in the manner prescribed therein and according to the require-
ments of the engineer as therein set forth for the amount below.
(Description of Project)
Item Description of item with unit Total
No. Qfy Unit bid price written in words amount bid
It is understood and agreed that the work shall be completed in full
within calendar days after the date on which work is to be
commenced as established by the Contract Documents.
Accompanying this proposal is a certified check, cashier's check or bid
bond, in the amount of $
made payable to
(Owner)
It is understood that the bid security accompanying this proposal shall
be returned to the undersigned unless, in case of the acceptance of this
proposal, the undersigned should fail to enter into a construction contract
and execute bonds as required it is understood and agreed that the bid
security shall be forfeited to the Owner and shall be considered as pay-
145
-------
ment for damages due to delay and other inconveniences suffered by the
Owner as a result of such failure on the part of the undersigned.
It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to reject any and all
bids.
In the event of Award of the Contract to the undersigned, the under-
signed agrees to furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, as provided
in the Specifications.
The undersigned certifies that the bid prices contained in this proposal
have been carefully checked and are submitted as correct and final.
Date Signed
(Company)
By
(Title)
(Address)
Witness
Seal (If Bidder is a Corporation)
Acknowledge Receipt of Addenda Below:
Addendum No.
Date Received
146
-------
Appendix C
Unit Price
Proposal
TO
FOR
Submitted by:
UNIT PRICE PROPOSAL
The undersigned acknowledges receipt of Drawings and Specifications
as listed under "Instruction to Bidders" dated ,
The undersigned agrees to furnish all labor, materials and facilities re-
quired for the execution of all the work called for in these Drawings and
Specifications for the unit prices set forth in the schedule of unit priced
appended hereto as Addendum A.
It is understood and agreed that the number of units of each item as
taken off the Drawings and set forth in Addendum A by the Bidder is
approximate and that payment will be made for the actual number of such
units incorporated in the work.
The undersigned, if he is the successful bidder, agrees to execute an
agreement with the Owner incorporating this Proposal and the various
Contract Documents. Failure to execute such an agreement, however, shall
not release the undersigned for a period of thirty days after termination
147
-------
of bidding from any or all obligations incurred by the submission of this
Proposal and its acceptance by the Owner.
BULLETINS: The undersigned further acknowledges receipt of Bulle-
tins as listed herewith and represents that any additions of modifications
to or deletions from the work called for in these Bulletins are included in
this Proposal.
Bulletin number Dated
(Note: If no Bulletins have been received write in "none".)
SUBCONTRACTORS: If awarded a contract for work proposed herein
and subsequent thereto the undersigned agrees to submit within thirty
days to the Owner for approval a list of those subcontractors he proposes
to employ in the execution of this contract work; and that he will let no
subcontracts nor authorize any proposed subcontractor to start work or
assume obligations for equipment and/or materials until receipt of written
approval from the Owner; and that upon written request by the Owner
will supply experience histories, financial data and such other qualifying
information required by the owner to fairly and completely evaluate the
proposed subcontractor's qualifications; and that subsequent to letting sub-
contracts will provide the Owner with a breakdown of various subcontract
amounts which will be used in processing partial payments.
SUBDIVISIONS OF THE PROPOSED AMOUNT: The undersigned
agrees, if awarded the Contract, that all invoices pertinent to the work
will be broken down in accordance with the Owner's major accounting
subdivisions as listed in the Schedule of Account Numbers in the "Instruc-
tions to Bidders."
FEES FOR ADDITIONAL WORK: The undersigned agrees that his fee
for additional work performed by direction of the Owner and not cov-
ered by unit prices set forth in this Proposal will be as follows:
For work of Subcontractors %
For work of Contractor's own forces %
The cost of such additional work shall be determined as outlined in the
General Conditions, as pretains to Change Orders and Field Orders.
FEES FOR ASSUMING CONTRACTS: The undersigned agrees to as-
sume and administer as subcontracts such other contracts for related work
as the Owner may elect to assign. The undersigned further agrees to accept
a fee of % of the assigned contract amount or amounts,
which fee shall be payment in full for assuming such contracts and admin-
istering them as subcontracts.
TIME OF COMPLETION: The undersigned agrees to start the work
immediately upon receipt of notice of award of contract and to carry the
work continuously to completion. The undersigned does hereby declare the
number of consecutive calendar days he will require to complete the work
to be based on a forty-hour work week. The succes-
148
-------
ful bidder will be required, within thirty days, to file with the Owner, in
duplicate, fully executed job schedules providing for completion within
the time so declared.
TAXES: All Federal, State and Local Taxes of all types, including but
not limited to any Excise Taxes, taxes upon personal property and Sales
and Use Taxes, when applicable, shall be included in the Proposal amount,
and whenever required by law shall be separately stated.
BONDS: If required, the undersigned will furnish performance and
payment bonds, the bond premium to be charged for separately and addi-
tionally to the bid price. The undersigned represents that this Proposal
does not include any amount for the cost of such bonds.
ASSIGNMENT: The undersigned represents that no assignment, sub-
lease, or transfer of all or any part of his interest in this proposal has been
made or will be made prior to the Owner's acceptance hereof, and the
undersigned agrees thereafter not to assign, sublet or transfer all or any
part of his interest herein without the written consent of the Owner.
ADDRESS, LEGAL STATUS AND SIGNATURE OF BIDDER: The
undersigned bidder does hereby designate the address give below as the
legal address to which all notices, directions, or other communications may
be served, or mailed.
Street Address
City State
The undersigned does hereby declare that the Bidder has the legal status
checked below:
Individual
Co-Partnership
Corporation, incorporated under the laws of the State of
-Doing business under an assumed name.
149
-------
Appendix D
Bid Schedule
Method
of
Bid payment
item article
45.
1.. . .
2.
3
4. . .
5. .
6.
7.
46.
8.
9.
10..
11. .
12.
47.
13. . .
14. . .
15.
16
48.
17.
18.. . ..
19.
20. .
49.
21.
50.
22. ...
23. .
51.
24
25
Estimated
Description quality
Test Holes and Samples
fl, " Diameter
fl. " Diameter
h. Geophysical/Mechanical
T,ogs; (Type)
c StrfltifrrflpViic T.nfrs
d. Formation Samples
e. Water (Aquifer) Samples
Well Construction
a. " Diameter
a. " Diameter
T.nga; (Typp>
d. Services of T/og Analyst
Well Casing Installation
a. " Diameter
h, Pities* T^nit
Well Grouting Installation
a. Grouting Installation
p. Pumping Grout Cervices
. d. Pressure Testing
Well Screens and Perforations
a. Screen or Perforated
Casing Furnished and
Installed
Well Filter Construction
(Artificial)
a. Artificial Well Filter
Furnished and Installed
p. Filter Material
Well Plumbness and Alignment
a, Plumbness and Alignment
Tests
h Drift Indicator Tests
Unit Total
Units price price
Tin, ft.
1,'n.ft.
Fach
Fach
Kach
Fach
T,in. ft. $ $
Lin, ft,
I, in, ft.
Kach
Fach
T.in ft $ $
T.in.ft.
F^el,
Fach
F,R<-h/ | f
bag
T.in.ft.
Cu. yd.
Each
T.in ft $ $
T.in ft $ $
Cn. yd.
Fach $ $
Each
150
-------
Bid
item
26. .
27...
28. .
29,
30. .
31.
32.
33.
Method
of
payment
article
52.
53.
V
54.
55.
Description
Well Development
a. Well Development
b. Chemicals
Well Testing for Performance
. . a. Installation and Removal
of Telling Equipment
b. Recovery Stand-by Time
. c. Discharge Pipe
Well Disinfection
. . . a. Well Disinfection
. . . b. Chemicals
Water Samples and Analyses
. . a. Water Analyses
Estimated Unit Total
quality Units price price
V.,rhf f f
hr.
bag
*Vh * *
P«r br.
T.in ft
Per t,r f f
Ppr Viajr
Per | *
Series
56. Permanent and Test Hole
Well Abandonment, and
Temporary Capping
34. ... .... a. Well Abandonment Lin. ft. $ $
35. .... . . b. Temporary Capping Each
The names and addresses of all persons interested as principals in this
Proposal are as follows:
Name Address
Signature of Bidder
Name
By
Date
151
-------
Appendix E
Standard Form of Agreement
Between Owner and Contractor
THIS AGREEMENT made as of the day of_
in the year 19 by and between,
(hereinafter called the OWNER) and
(hereinafter called the CONTRACTOR)
WITNESSETH THAT the OWNER and CONTRACTOR in consider-
ation of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows:
Article 1. WORK. The CONTRACTOR will perform all Work as shown
in the Contract Documents for the completion of the Project generally
described as follows: Construction of
Article 2. ENGINEER. The Project has been designed by_
(agency)
Article 3. CONTRACT TIME. The Work shall be completed within
calendar days after the date which the OWNER shall designate
in writing to the CONTRACTOR as the date on which it is expected that
the CONTRACTOR will start the Work.
Article 4. CONTRACT PRICE. The OWNER will pay the CONTRAC-
TOR for performance of the Work and completion of the Project in ac-
cordance with the Contract Documents subject to adjustment by Modifi-
cations as provided therein as follows:
Article 5. PROGRESS AND FINAL PAYMENTS. The OWNER will
make progress payments on account of the Contract Price as provided in
the General Conditions as follows:
5.1 Progress and final payments will be on the basis of the CON-
TRACTOR'S Applications for Payment as approved by the OWNER.
5.2 On or about the th day of each month during construction:
percent of the Work completed and, percent of material
and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably
stored, less in each case the aggregate of payments previously made.
152
-------
5.3 Upon Substantial Completion, a sum sufficient to increase the total
payments to the CONTRACTOR to percent of the Contract Price
less retainages as the OWNER shall determine for all incompleted work
and unsettled claims.
5.4 Upon final completion of the Work and Settlement of all claims,
the remainder of the Contract Price.
Article 6. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents which
comprise the contract between the OWNER AND THE CONTRACTOR are
attached hereto and made a part hereof and consist of the following:
6.1 This Agreement (Pages to inclusive),
6.2 Exhibits to this Agreement (Pages to inclusive)
6.3 Specifications consisting of:
Notice to Bidders (Pages to— inclusive)
General Conditions (Pages to inclusive)
Special Conditions (Pages to inclusive)
Technical Provisions (Pages to inclusive)
6.4 Drawings and Plans as listed in the attached Exhibit
6.5 Addenda numbers ( to inclusive), and
6.6 Any Modifications, including Change Orders, duly delivered after
execution of this Agreement.
Article 7. MISCELLANEOUS
7.1 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article 1 of the
General Conditions shall have the meanings indicated in the General Con-
ditions.
7.2 Neither the OWNER nor the CONTRACTOR shall, without the
prior written consent of the other, assign or sublet in whole or in part his
interest under any of the Contract Documents and, specifically, the CON-
TRACTOR shall not assign any monies due or to become due without the
prior written consent of the OWNER.
7.3 The OWNER and the CONTRACTOR each binds himself, his
partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party
hereto in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in
the Contract Documents.
7.4 The Contractor Documents constitute the entire agreement between
the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR and may only be altered, amended
or repealed by a duly executed written instrument.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agree-
ment the day and year first above written.
OWNER CONTRACTOR
By By
(CORPORATE SEAL) (CORPORATE SEAL)
Attest: Attest:
153
-------
APPENDIX F
STANDARD FORM
WELL ESTIMATE AND/OR WELL DRILLING CONTRACT
OR REPAIR ORDER AGREEMENT
Purchaser's Name_
Address
City
WELL PERMIT COST I .
1. WELL AND PRICE
2. PUMP AND PRICE-
3. SCREEN AND PRICE-
4. DEVELOPING, SURGING AND PRICE.
5. CHLORINATING AND PRICE
6. REPAIR WORK AND PRICE
7. TOTAL CASH PRICE
I. TOTAL DOWN PAYMENT.
• 9. AMOUNT FINANCED
10. FINANCE CHARGE
11. TOTAL OF PAYMENTS-
12. DEFERRED PAYMENT PRICE (7+ 10L-
•13. ANNUAL PERCENTAGE RATE,
14. In this Conttict the term WELL lhall eoniiit of th. HOLE and CASING ONLY
15. The depth of the well shall be meaiured from the top of the ground to the bottom of the well, and it u agreed that if the depth be
leu than 60 feet, the minimum charge will be for 60 feet.
16. Drilling Contractor reserves the right to reduce the size of the casing and/or abandon drilling If drilling Is abandoned the cash down
payment shall be retained by the Drilling Contractor to bquldate operation costs.
17. All electric wiring, installations and connections, and any and all non-drilling work will be furnished by the Purchaser at no charge
to the Drilling Contractor.
18. LEGAL DESCRIPTION of Section, Twp Range or Lot in Block Plat
in the City of State and that (aid property is free and clear of
all incumbrances "'•yp*
19. The undersigned agrees that title in and to any and all materials furnished by the Drilling Contractor whether in the ground or
attached to the premises shall remain with the Drilling Contractor and the Drilling Contractor has the right to withdraw the casing from
the well and materials from the premises A mechanic's hen is hereby acknowledged to secure the amount of contract or repairs. The
cash down payment will be retained by the Drilling Contractor to bquldate damages for the breach of the contract. This clause is binding
until full payment is received.
20. Interest at the rate of six per cent will be charged on all money not paid when due
154
-------
21 All agreements and understandings are contained nercm and there are no verbal representations or agreements not herein contained.
22 I hereby authorize the above contract and/or repair work together with the necessary materials and will pay I on
signing this contract Unless deferred payment is provided for in paragraphs 9 through 13 above, I will pay for the drilling and casing
when completed and the balance immediately on completion of the WELL SYSTEM.
23 BANK REFERENCES.
THIS CONTRACT ACCEPTED BY PURCHASER DRILLING CONTRACTOR
Telephone No Telephone No .
•Where a finance charge u imposed or where payment is made in more than four installments and where Purchaser is an individual and
where the well or repair of well if for personal, family, household or agricultural purposes, tlte attached Notice of Recumon form must
be completed and be given to Purchaser with a signed copy of this contract. The Notice of Recission need not be completed in cues
where emergency repairs are required and where the Purchaser provides a handwritten waiver as follows "I wish you to come on my
premises and make repairs to my water system for the reason that my health, safety and property are in danger by non-operation of my
water system. Because of this emergency 1 waive my rights to cancel or rescind this repair transaction
•Signatui
* 'Calculation of the Annual Percentage Rate can be extremely complex. You should consult your bookkeeper or accountant to insure
a calculation of this rate.
NOTICE TO PURCHASER- You are entitled to a copy of the contract you sign You have the nght to pay in advance any unpaid
balance of this contract and obtain a partial refund of the finance charge, if any
This Well Estimate and/or Well Drilling Contract or Repair Order Agreement has been prepared for the use of well contractors by the
National Water Well Association, 88 East Broad Street, Columbus, Ohio 43215
NOTICE OF RESCISSION
Owner's Name
Contractor-Creditor
(Identification of Transaction)
Notice to Customer Required By Federal Law
You have entered into a transaction on
(Date)
which may result in a hen, mortgage, or other security interest on your home You have a legal right under federal law to cancel this
transaction, if you desire to do so, without any penalty or obligation within three business days from the above date or any later date on
which all material disclosures requixed under the Truth in Lending Act have been given to you. If you so cancel the transaction, any lien,
mortgage, or other security interest on your home arising from this transaction is automatic ally void You are also entitled to receive a
refund of any downpayment or other consideration if you cancel If you decide to cancel thu transaction, you may do so by notifying
(Name of Creditor)
at _
(Address of Creditor's Place of Business)
by mad or telegram sent not later than midnight of , , , _.
(Date)
You may also use any otKer form of written notice identifying the transaction if it is delivered to the above address not later than that
time This notice may be used for that purpose by dating and signing below.
(Date) (Customer's Signature)
Note Each owner of property on which well is to be drilled m -eccive a copy of this form.
155
-------
Appendix G.
METRIC-ENGLISH UNIT CONVERSION TABLE
(Read as follows: Dimension—metric unit (symbol) equals
English equivalent).
Length—
1 meter (m) = 39 37 inches = 3 28 feet = 1 09 yards
1 kilometer (km) = 062 miies.
1 millimeter (mm) = 0 03937 inches.
1 centimeter (cm) = 0.3937 inches,
1 micrometer (^m) = 3.937 X 10"s = 104 A
Area—
1 square meter (m7) == 10 744 square feet = 1 196 square
yards
1 square kilometer (km2) = .384 square miles = 247 acres
1 square centimeter (cm2) = 0 155 square inches.
1 square millimeter (mm2) = 0 00155 square inches
1 hectare (ha) = 2.471 acres
Volume—
1 cubic meter (m3) = 35314 cubic feet = 1.3079 cubic
yards.
1 cubic centimeter (cm3) = 0.061 cubic inches
1 liter (1) = 1.057 quarts = 0 264 gallons = 0.81 X 10"6
acre-feet.
Mass—
1 kilogram (kg) = 2 205 pounds.
1 gram (g) = 0 035 ounces = 15.43 grams
1 milligram (mg) = 0 01543 grains.
1 tonne (t) = 0 984 ton (long) = 1.1023 ton (short)
Time-
second day (s day)
year (yr or a)
Force—
1 newton (N) = 0 22481 pounds (weight) = 75 poundals
Velocity, unear—
1 meter per second (m/s) = 3.28 feet per second.
1 millimeter per second (mm/s) = 0.00328 feet per second.
1 kilometer per second (km/s) = 2 230 miles per hour
Velocity, angular-
radians per second (rad/s).
Flow (volumetric)—
1 cubic meter per second (m3/s) = 15,850 gallons per
minute = 2,120 cubic feet per minute.
' 1 liter per second (1/s) = 15 85 gallons per minute
Viscosity-
poise = 1.45 X 10 s pounds (weight) seconds/square inch
Pressu re—
1 newton per square meter (N/m2) = 0 00014 pounds per
square inch.
1 kilonewton per square meter (kN/m2) = 0.145 pounds
per square inch.
1 kilogram (force) per square centimeter = 14.223 pounds
per square inch.
Temperature—
5F
1 degree Kelvin (K) or 1 degree Celsius (C) = 17 77.
Work, energy, quantity of heat—
1 joule (J) = 2 778 X 10"7 kilowatt-hours = 3 725 X 10"7
horsepower-hours = 0 73756 foot-pounds = 9.48 X 10"*
British thermal units
1 kilojoule (kj) = 2 778 kilowatt-hours
Power—
watt (W)
joule per second (J/s).
kilowatt (kW).
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Region V, Library
230 South Dearborn Street
Chicago. Illinois 60604
U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1976 O S96-8B!
156
-------
45.
:. 45.
46,
i
(j\
-a
:.46.
47.
;". 47.
48.
,".48.
/
/
/
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
%,»
3
4
4
4
§•!!;
4
5
5
5
P?
.5
6
6
6
31
6
?
;' '
7
7
il'-p
7
S
»
8
a
9
'•••:•
9
9
9
/ * t " &&_ * u
(..Is therefore
6
49.
:. 49.
50.
»
/.so.
51.
.*. 5 I
52.
/. 52.
/
1
1
1
2
2
••.
2
Z
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
'..«!•:
5
5
6
€
6
6
?
7
7
7
8
8
-$
i
8
9
I,.'''-
9
9
9
V
53.
;. 53.
54.
:. 54.
55.
:. 55.
56.
;, 56.
/
/
/
t
2
2
ill
z
2
3
3
lijliii
3
3-
4
4
FB
4
4
5
5
•rir
5
s
6
6
6
S
7
7
].-••,
7
7
8
8
H' ,
a
a
S
9\
3l
i
I
9]
-------
SPECIF (CATIONS PREPARATIC^ WORKS.1EET ©UfDE
>.
* * -
;«4 CPI'CTlfi: A »MI to be designed t»ml»r
the following conditionsT
• Cg.Tf .t_A USED - SPECIFIC CONOITIQN
As,; parpcM, - .Municipal __
^
JJ.
CftcectarcrfWervcl perefroted.-Uneonsoli dated
Cnorot'tr oiisifoducing zone, -Unconsolidated ,
'•Construction m«in sf *xl)
Ox
45.
.". 45.
46.
:.46,
47.
*
;. 47.
4&
:.48»
1
F
1
5
UP
7
i?
if
.'
P
2
Z
S
' '
6
rf
IF
2
^
4
2
•5
3
3
2
2
1
I
3
1
1
3
4
,4
4
!•?
IP
f
1
4
"1
1
^
*
3
5
2"
2
I.P
U>
S
f
1
5
0
0
s
"*
3J
IF
e
t
I
f
te»,
i
7
~* -
i
I
>
7
U>
IP
J
IP
LP
4 | (Vertical Columns a!
Muster Xsy.)
^"h^**-*. ~~ '" ~ v".'~
. .) » therefore
I*
1 H ' :
t
*
8 9}
«p
.
-
4ft T
- 4
.1 4-a
.-^
50.
. -
.".SO.
SL
.*. S 1.
52.
.'.W.
t
f
,
^.
bfc
^>
1
~-_
IT
'
*
^
ML,
T
^
V
w
"
/
*^
i
,-
^r.
^
?
:S
S
•i
fc
l£
-
LC
2
;|»
t
I,P
'
(
1
3
2'
2
.2
2
3
3
I
i
4
21
"""•
2
'
Z
2
4
4
"fr.
5
"9)
9
W
1
5
5
%,
!
e
;I,
1
t.
1
e
e
'4
4
f
•P
P-
i;
4
7
?
^
I
8 S
•s, •
*M "' '
!S
LP
a 9
,
8 9~
!_
1 1
5S.
.'. 53.
54.
1 |
-t-"~
:.54.
55.
.'.85.
^,
St.
.'.86.
;
ff
kf
r
i
^
~
i
i
T
i
2 2> i e',?\«:9
Tl
W;*F
i
S * •" ' '
1 t*2!
- i -f\
I • 1 '
i jFj-3 r^5E-j>: !
' ' '- » i
4 %
i ,
t i
i >«j
! - .it
•' •• ' i!l
; ; j -Is-'
i i i':*: i3«> i
?I3 t-ff f\7 i 9
3_
si
SF
2J*.
* !$'•
1 ,- >M
•i i.,1 ki
LFiS'SKUFS'! 'LPI
2|5 4{«p'£]7J» SJ
1
L i
1-t-rj7
"f n"-
"T^^-JIL,
"~ , «F
i 1 ^
^FTT^t'i "u* ]
$•* BH»k Worfcshwt for Pianaratton of "tour Will Sp«eifi«otiofa.
-------
------- |